Annexure 1 Layout map

Annexure 1

Layout map

Please register PDF Splitter and Merger

DEMO


DEMO


DEMO

Annexure 2

Photograph of EPS facility


DEMO


DEMO

Annexure 3

Photograph of baseline data collection & Public hearing


DEMO


DEMO

Photographs of public hearing


DEMO

Annexure 4

Detail Geohydrology report


DEMO

Draft Report on

ON

Ground Water Investigation Studies to Assess the Present Status of Ground Water

Conditions for Impact Assessment on Environment around propose M/S GSPC Limited

plant

Site:

Village –Ambaliyara, Taluka – Dholka, Dist- Ahmedabad,

Gujarat

Forwarded to:

M/s Detox Pvt. Limited

Surat

From:

Ground Water Consultancy Services

I-202, Nanddham Apartments, Nr. Vasana Barrage, Vasna,

Ahmedabad – 380 007

Mobile: 9824 132 132

Email:[email protected]


DEMO

Contents

1.0 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 4

2.0 Scope of Work ............................................................................................................................. 5

3.0 Details of the Study Area ............................................................................................................. 5

4.0 Geology of the area ...................................................................................................................... 7

5.0 Hydrogeology .............................................................................................................................. 8

6.0 Geo hydrological Investigation .................................................................................................... 9

7.0 Present status of Ground water quality ...................................................................................... 11

8.0 Ground Water Resources Estimates of Dholka Taluka ............................................................. 11

9.0 Recharge into Ground Water Aquifer ........................................................................................ 13

10.0 Conclusions & Recommendations ............................................................................................. 16

List of Tables

Table 1: Information of Site

Table 2: Chemical analysis of water sample of Wells in & around GSPC

Table 3: Information on Ground water Resources

Table 4: Information on Land Use

Table 5: Water Consumption Details

Table 6: Waste Water Generation

Table 7: Estimation on Effective Runoff

Table 8: Estimation on storage capacity of Pond

Table 9: Expected Recharge


DEMO

List of Plates

Plate 1: Map of Dholka Taluka

Plate 2: Map showing Sardar Sarovar Project Canal Command

Plate 3: Map showing project site

Plate 4: Geological Succession

Plate 5: Geological Cross Section from Nayakpur to Virpur

Plate 6: Lithological of deepest piezometer at Ambaliyara

Plate 7: Lithological of deepest piezometer at Chaloda

Plate 8: Hydrograph of Chaloda

Plate 9: Recharge Pond


DEMO

A Report on Ground Water Investigation Studies for Assessing the Present Status of Ground Water

Conditions for Impact Assessment on Environment and assessing the feasibility for recharge structure

construction around M/s GSPC propose site at well M1 A 1 and M1, Village – Ambaliyara, Taluka –

Dholka, Dist- Ahmedabad, Gujarat

1.0 Introduction

GSPC has taken up a major expansion plan for enhancing its oil and gas production in different

location in the state of Gujarat. The information of this site is given in Table 1:

Table 1: Information of Site

Serial

No

Name of

Site

Latitude &

Longitude

Site location

Area in m2

1 M1 A 1

22°45’27.78”N

72º30’44.34” E

Survey no.: 827, 828, 829,

830P, 832, 833

Village: Ambaliyara

Taluka: Dholka

District: Ahmedabad

State: Gujarat

22585 sq.m

2 M 1

22°45’38.30”N

72º30’35.20” E

Survey no.:

832,833,835,836,832

Village: Ambaliyara

Taluka: Dholka

District: Ahmedabad

State: Gujarat

19418.3

sq.m

The location of this site is shown in plate I, II & III. Total Land Area at well site M1 A 1 is 22585 sq

m and at well site M1 is 19418.3 sq .m


DEMO

The Development of such project also needs water. The alert and foresighted management of this

company is quite conscious and aware about the importance of water requirement. Engineers &

planners associated with this project have decided to adopt scientific& and systematic approach for

planning ground water development and for rainwater harvesting system design for enhancing

recharge to ground water aquifer. Therefore, they have engaged and availed the service of

experienced consulting services in this specialized field. The work was entrusted to Ahmedabad

based firm M/s Ground Water Consultancy Services for studying the Hydro Geological Conditions in

and around this project site area for assessing the present status of ground water conditions

and also identifying feasible sites for recharge structure construction.

This report presents Hydro Geological Survey & Investigation Studies in and around the present

project site area on assessment of ground water conditions. The base line data has been studied,

analyzed and interpreted for assessing the present status of ground water conditions and identifying

feasible sites for recharge structures construction.

2.0 Scope of Work

• Site visit for propose project site

• Review of earlier work done

• Conducting Geo hydrological studies within 5 kilometer radius and also collecting the water

sample for assessing the present status on ground water quality

• Preparing action plan to take measures for rain water harvesting from roof top and storm

water drain to recharge ground water aquifer

• Preparation of Detail Geo hydrological Report

3.0 Details of the Study Area

Location of the Area

The existing well site M1 A 1 and M 1 of GSPC is located at Village –Ambaliyara, Taluka –

Dholka, Dist- Ahmedabad, Gujarat.

It is bordered in the north by Chandisar, in North West by Village Vasana Keliya, in the south by

village by Sathal and in west by village Vazira and Raipur of Dholka Taluka of Ahmedabad District

of Gujarat State. The Map of Dholka taluka is given in Plate 1, Map showing Sardar Sarovar Project


DEMO

(SSP) Canal Command is shown in Plate 2 and Map showing Project Site is given in Plate 3.

Physically it falls in Narmada canal command area

Communication

Village Ambaliyara is connected by Kaccha/ Asphalt Road with Taluka Head Quarter Dholka. It is

connected with State Transport Buses. Private means of Transport are also available to reach this

village.

Physiography & Drainage

The study area is almost flat. There exist no distinct natural drains in this area. The general ground

gradients are sloping from North to South or more precisely in North-East to South-West direction.

The Sabarmati river lies in the eastern part of the study area and flowing from almost North to South.

From topography point of view, there is no much variation in ground gradient.

Climate

The climate of the study area is Semi Arid. Hot summer and general dryness characterize it, except

during the southwest monsoon season which experiences heavy rain. There are four distinct seasons

in the area. The cold season begins from December to February, which is followed by hot summer

from March to Middle of June. The period from mid-June to Sept. is the Southwest monsoon season,

October and November months constitute Post monsoon season which is characterized by moderate

temperature and scanty rain. Except for monsoon season the climate, in general, is dry.

Evaporation Data

The Ahmedabad is the nearest Hydro meteorological Laboratory data indicates that the data indicates

that Average Daily Evaporation rate is 7.22 mm per day.

The data indicates that Average Daily Evapo-transpiration rate is 5.44 mm per day.

Rainfall

The period from mid-June to Sept. is the Southwest monsoon season. Over 90% of the annual

rainfall occurs during Southwest monsoon period that is from 15th June to 15th September.

Average Long Term Rainfall in mm for the period (1963-2002) is 643.78 mm

Average Short Term rainfall in mm for the period (2003-2012) is 824.8 mm

The Number of rainy days would be 36.6 for Ahmedabad.


DEMO

4.0 Geology of the area

The entire area of Ahmedabad district comprises a cover of thick alluvium with a few sporadic

outcrops of Deccan Trap and Limestone toward the southern parts of region. The geological set up of

the area is somewhat similar to that of Cambay Basin. Geophysical investigation was carried out by

ONGC for the search of oil. On the basis of these findings the succession of the rock types in the area

is as follow It is revealed from the study of the data collected during earlier investigation, the regional

Geological Succession is given in Plate 4

General Geology of the Study Area

From the observation of the litho logical logs of the bore-hole data in & around the study area within

the depth explored, it is observed that the formation comprises of Alluvium Aeolian & fluvial

deposits. It is composed of sand, silt, gravel, clay and kankar. The thickness of alluvium is estimated

to be about 400 m. Refer Plate 5 for geological Cross Section from Nayakpur to Virpur

Sub-Surface Geological Cross Sections

In order to have an idea about the sub-surface deposition of aquifers, its lateral extent, and thickness

and inter connection within & with the adjacent areas, sub surface geological cross sections was

studied. In case of such study, knowledge on sub-surface condition and it’s inter-connection with the

adjacent area is very important. It enable design engineer in estimating the sub surface lateral inflow

coming into the area in question and also estimating sub-surface out-flow going out from such areas

to the adjacent area. It could also help in taking possible measures in designing surface as well as

subsurface drainage. It is pertinent to mention that in general, the ground water flow follows surface

topography. The general ground water flow direction is from North to South direction or more

precisely North East to South West direction

Sub-Surface geological cross-section along Nayakpur (Viramgam) to Virpur (Dholka Taluka)

Ahmedabad) in NW-SE direction (Plate 5)

The Sub surface geological cross-section shows almost flat topography with the gentle slope in South

east direction. It shows that the sub-surface deposit follows surface topography. This cross-section

also reveals that the aquifers are well connected in this cross section. Clay occurs in the form of

lenses and as continuous layers. The swelling and pinching characteristic are also observed in the

layers. The predominance in clay deposit is also found at places. The water level is also found in

confining pressure or in artesian condition. .


DEMO

5.0 Hydrogeology

• From the observation and study of the relevant information of GWRDC Tube Wells in and

around the study area it is inferred that

• In and around the study area ground water occurs in Alluvium aquifers which comprises

of alternate beds of sand, clay, kankar mixed with clay are occurring in this area.

• The thickness and extent of this aquifer vary with respect to space and depth.

• In this area ground water occurs in the zone of primary porosity. The quantity of ground water

stored in the aquifer depends on the grain size of the aquifer material, its hydraulic

characteristics and thickness. Ground water is mainly occurring under unconfined shallow

confined, deep confined or more precisely semi-confined conditions.

From the above observations, of GWRDC tube well data it is observed that Ground water occurs

under confined or more precisely semi-confined conditions.

• It is pertinent to mention that Study area falls in the southern side of Sardar Sarovar Canal

Command Project.

• This area falls in over CRITICAL Category from the ground water development point of

view.

• Narmada Main Canal is already in operation through which perennial water supply has been

started but this perennial water supply may be only for domestic water supply

• The unconfined aquifers in and around the study area are practically dried up and

groundwater occurs mainly under shallow confined and deep confined condition.

It is pertinent to mention that recently GWRDC has drilled three piezometers (tube wells) at same

location tapping different aquifers depth to study its depth wise aquifer characteristics. To study

depth wise position of water level and also variation in water quality information on litho logical of

deepest piezometer is given in Plate 6 and Plate 7

Gujarat Water Resources Development Corporation (GWRDC) Gandhinagar is monitoring

observation tube wells for periodic measurements of water level fluctuations and water quality

variation in and around the study area. One such tube wells tapping deep confined aquifers at village


DEMO

Chaloda is monitored for periodic measurements of water level fluctuations and water quality

variation.

Hydrograph Analysis

The long-term water level fluctuation data for the period 1998 to 2002 of the nearest observation tube

well located at village Chaloda Taluka Dholka of Ahmedabad District was examined and is given in

Plate 8

From the observation of these hydrographs, following conclusion could be drawn.

• The overall Rising trend is observed in water level which could be attributed due to improved

recharge condition due to assured surface water supply in upstream North, and North East

direction of the study area

6.0 Geo hydrological Investigation

To have an idea about the latest information of selected wells were investigated the information of

which is given in Table 2

Table 2: Chemical analysis of water sample of Wells in & around GSPC

Site: Village –Ambaliyara, Taluka – Dholka, Dist- Ahmedabad

Parameter Unit Result

Gram

Panchayat

Bachan

patel

Purshottam

Patel

Pankaj

Ratila Patel

Bhikha Patel

1 2 3 4 5

Ele.

Conductivity

Micromh

os/cm

2090 2100 1980 2110 2040

Ph -- 8.02 8.28 8.00 8.07 8.60

T.D.S. ppm 1400 1400 1350 1430 1350

CATIONS

Ca ppm 55 50 50 45 45

Mg ” 42 45 45 48 42


DEMO

Na ” 334 37 332 339 334

K ” 4.1 4.10 3.9 4.1 3.9

ANIONS

CO3 ppm Nil 12 Nil Nil 12

HCO3 ” 476 451 439 500 415

SO4 ” 83 120 113 128 109

Cl ” 400 376 360 360 384

F ” 0.73 0.75 0.71 0.73 0.71

NO3 ” 4.50 4.60 4.60 4.40 4.60

Total Hardness ppm 310 310 260 310 285

Total

Alkalinity

” 480 480 440 500 440

Colours CO-PT Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear

Odour -- Odour

Free

Odour

Free

Odour Free Odour Free Odour Free

Turbidity N.T.U. Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil

From the observation of well inventory data it is inferred that the

• The drilling depth is varying from145 to 160 m below ground level

• The discharge of these tube well is ranging from 550 to 650 lpm


• The depth to water level is ranging from 35 to 40 meter below ground level

• The range of Horse Power use in pumping ground water is ranging from 25 to 30 HP


DEMO

7.0 Present status of Ground water quality

Total Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) content in ground water ppm, its range: 1350 ppm to 1430 ppm

Nitrate content in ground water in ppm, its range 4.40 ppm to 4.60 ppm

Bicarbonate content in ground water in ppm, its range 439 ppm to 500 ppm

Total Hardness in water is ranging from 260 ppm to 310 ppm

8.0 Ground Water Resources Estimates of Dholka Taluka

Information on Ground water Resources

Ground water potential has been estimated by the committee on estimation of ground water resources

and irrigation potential from ground water in Gujarat by Narmada Water Resources Water Supply

and Kalpasar Department, Govt. of Gujarat, March 2002. It has estimated the Ground water potential

for entire Ahmedabad District

Table 3: Information on Ground water Resources

Gross Recharge mcm/year 30.94

Net Available Recharge mcm/year 29.39

Annual Draft mcm/year 29.11

Ground Water Balance -1.56

Present Category of Taluka Year 2002 Critical

From the ground water development point of view Dholka Taluka of Ahmedabad District falls in

Critical category where ground water development is 99.05 percent.

The study area falls in Sardar Sarovar Project Canal Command & due to perennial surface water

supply additional recharge component in the form of canal seepage and return seepage from irrigated

field to underneath ground water aquifer is likely. In this canal command, conjunctive water use of

surface and ground water is planned

From above information it is implied that although this area falls in SSP Canal Command, before

undertaking any ground water development in this area utmost care need to be taken. Ground water

development and Water conservation measures need to be implemented and encouraged carefully

based on scientific approach in this area.


DEMO

Table 4: Information of Wells in and around the Study Area of

GSPC Site: Village –Ambaliyar Taluka – Dholka, Dist- Ahmedabad

Sr.

No.

Village

Talufz)ka Owner’s Name Location Well / Bore Well Depth to

Water Level

in m below

ground level

Total

Depth

in m

below

ground

level

Pump

Details

Discharge in

liter per

minute

(LPM)

Sample

No.

Remarks

1 Ambaliyara Dholka Gram Panchayat Gramtal Tube Well 35.00 150.00 EM.25 550 1 Saline

2 Ambaliyara Dholka Bachan patel On way to

VAZIFA

Tube Well 38.50 160.00 EM.30 600 2 Saline

3 Ambaliyara Dholka Purshottam Patel Naer Rajpur

road

Tube Well 37.00 150.00 EM.30 550 3 Saline

4 Rajpur Dholka Pankaj RatilaL

Patel

Nr Gramtal Tube Well 40.00 155.00 EM.30 550 4

5 Jalalpur

(vajifa

Dholka Bhikha Patel Nr Gramta Tube Well 36.50 145.00 EM.30 600 5

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

9.0 Recharge into Ground Water Aquifer

Land Area Break Up

Land area break up for M1 A1 and M1 is as mentioned below:

Table 5: Information on Land Use

Purpose Land area for M 1 Land area for M 1 A1

Build up area 678 sq m 550 sq m

Open area 12331.91 sq m 14581.95 sq m

Green belt area 6408.39 sq m 7453.05 sq m

Total area 19418.3 sq.m 22585 sq.m

Total Water Consumption

Water Consumption

The daily total water consumption at EPS#M1 and EPS#M1A1 is as mentioned in table below

Table 6: Water Consumption Details

M 1 M 1 A 1

Domestic 0.405 KL/day 0.405 KL/day

Industrial (for bath heater) 0.3 KL/day 0.3 KL/day

Fire water make up 2 KL/day 2 KL/day

Total 2.705 KL/day 2.705 KL/day

(A)

1. At plant site M1, assuming 300 working days, yearly water requirement for industrial use will

be 690 m 3

2. At plant site M1, Assuming 300 working days, yearly water requirement for domestic use will

be 121.5 m 3


DEMO

(B)

1. At plant site M1A1, Assuming 300 working days, yearly water requirement for industrial use

will be 690 m 3

2. At plant site M1, Assuming 300 working days, yearly water requirement for domestic use will

be 121.5 m 3


M1 M 1 A1

Produced Water 2 KL/day 3 KL/day



Recharge into Ground Water Aquifer is deliberate attempt for collecting /concentrating, storing and

distributing rain water. The method is site specific and need based. Catchments includes Roof top,

Compounds, pavements and land surface.

It may be possible to collect rainwater by creating necessary infrastructure construction for

collecting; diverting and storing it into groundwater reservoir. If plan properly and designed

scientifically it may aid in improving recharge availability and opportunity.

Based on the observation of the field condition Recharge structure like recharge well and Recharge

tank/pond are feasible at this site. But Recharge tank/pond is preferred.

Rainfall is one of the important Parameters that contribute water for the purpose of recharge into

ground water reservoir and therefore estimation on its likely quantum is of prime importance for the

purpose of estimating recharge quantum.

Table 8: Estimation on Effective Runoff

Well No Land use Total Area in

sq m

Rain fall in

mm

Runoff

Coefficient

Runoff

Volume in m3

EPS#M1

Build up area 678 sq m 824.8 0.85 475.332

Open area 12331.91 sq m 824.8 0.30 3051.407

Green belt 6408.39 sq m 824.8 0.40 2114.256


DEMO

area

EPS#M1A1

Build up area 550 sq m 824.8 0.85 385.594

Open area 14581.95 sq m 824.8 0.30 3608.157

Green belt

area

7453.05 sq m 824.8 0.40 2458.910

At Plant site M1 the estimated effective runoff that can be used for the purpose of recharge = 2589.5

m3 (Green Belt Area: 2114.256 m3 + Construction: 475.332 m3)

A Plant site M1A1, the estimated effective runoff that can be used at plant site for the purpose of

recharge = 2844.5 m3 (Green Belt Area: 2458.91 m3 + Construction: 385.59 m3)

Recharge pond

Looking to the surface soil condition and sub-surface aquifer characteristics, it is better to construct

Recharge pond to have better recharge rate because recharge rate is a function of surface area. If

depth of pond is increased then reduction in evaporation rate is likely. Therefore, in order to reduce

the loss of water quantum through evaporation, the depth of recharge pond should be more than 2.5

m. The size tentative size of recharge pond may have dimension as given below:

Table 9: Estimation on storage capacity of Pond

Serial No Length of

pond in m

Width of pond

in m

Depth of

pond in m

Volume of Water likely to be

stored in m 3

1 45 45 5 10125

2 40 40 5 8000

3 30 30 5 4500

4 25 25 5 3125

The estimated required recharge based on Industrial and domestic consumption may vary from 690

m3 to 750 m3.

By constructing small percolation tank having suitable size depending on land availability it be

possible to recharge 690 m3 to 750 m3 rainwater into ground water aquifer.


DEMO

Recharge Percolation Well

Based on the local hydro geological conditions Recharge Percolation well appears to be feasible for

its construction

Components of recharge well comprises of Filtration pit, Large Diameter Well along with necessary

infrastructure. It is necessary to create necessary infrastructure to divert & collect rain water for

making it available towards recharge structure after subjected it through filtration.

In general, radius of well is kept large to accommodate fairly large quantity of rainwater that gives

more surface area, space and time for increasing recharge rate.

Considering the average recharge rate of 2 liter per second per well, the likely total recharge per well

may be 10368.00 m3 per well

Table 10: Expected Recharge

Expected

Recharge Rate

Per Well

Seconds Minutes Hours Days Total recharge

in m3 per well

Number

of wells

Total

recharge in

m3/season

2 60 60 24 60 10368.00 1 10368.00

2 60 60 24 60 10368.00 2 20736.00

10.0 Conclusions & Recommendations

• The well site M1 A1 and M1 of GSPC is located at Village – Ambaliyara, Taluka – Dholka,

Dist- Ahmedabad, Gujarat.

• The site in located in Sardar Sarovar Project (SSP) Canal Command area and falls in the

southern side of Sardar Sarovar Canal Command. Project.

• Village Ambaliyara is connected by Kaccha/ Asphalt Road with Taluka Head Quarter Dholka.

It is connected with State Transport Buses. Private means of Transport are also available to

reach this village.

• The study area is almost flat. There exist no distinct natural drains in this area. The general

ground gradients are sloping from North to South or more precisely in North-East to South-

West direction.


DEMO

• The Sabarmati river lies in the eastern part of the study area and flowing from almost North to

South.

• The climate of the study area is Semi Arid.

• The Average Daily Evaporation rate is 7.22 mm per day. The Average Daily Evapo-

transpiration rate is 5.44 mm per day.

• The Average Short Term rainfall is 824.8 mm. The Number of rainy days would be 36.6 for

Ahmedabad.

• Geologically, the entire area of Ahmedabad district comprises a cover of thick alluvium. In &

around the study area within the depth explored, the formation comprises of Alluvium

Aeolian & fluvial deposits. It is composed of sand, silt, gravel, clay and kankar. The thickness

of alluvium is estimated to be about 400 m.

• The thickness and extent of these aquifer vary with respect to space and depth. At plant site,

the ground water flow follows surface topography. The general ground water flow direction is

from North to South direction or more precisely North East to South West direction.

• Ground water is mainly occurring under unconfined, shallow confined, deep confined or more

precisely semi-confined conditions.

• In this area ground water occurs in the zone of primary porosity. Ground water occurs under

confined or more precisely semi-confined conditions. From the ground water development

point of view this area falls in Critical Category

• Due to operation of Narmada Main Canal, there is perennial water supply which may be only

for domestic water supply.

• It is pertinent to mention that recently GWRDC has drilled three piezometers (tube wells) at

same location tapping different aquifers depth to study its depth wise water level, depth wise

aquifer characteristics and also variation in water quality.

• From the long-term water level fluctuation data for the period 1998 to-2002 of the nearby

observation tube well located at Village Chaloda, Taluka Dholka of Ahmedabad District

shows overall rising trend in water level profile which could be attributed due to improved


DEMO

recharge condition due to assured surface water supply in upstream North, and North East

direction of the study area

From the observation of well inventory data it is inferred that the

• The drilling depth is varying from145 m to 160 m below ground level



• The depth to water level is ranging from 35 to 40 meter below ground level

• The range of Horse Power use in pumping ground water is ranging from 25 to 30 HP

• The information on chemical analysis of water sample indicates that

o Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) content in ground water ranges from 1350 ppm to 1430

ppm

o Nitrate content in ground water ranges 4.40 ppm to 4.60 ppm. Bicarbonate content in

ground water in ranges from 439 ppm to 500 ppm

o Total Hardness in water is ranging from 260 ppm to 310 ppm

o By creating necessary infrastructure construction, it may be possible to collect, divert

and store rainwater into groundwater reservoir. If plan properly and designed

scientifically it may aid in improving recharge availability and opportunity.

o The estimated required recharge based on Industrial and domestic consumption may

vary from 690 m3 to 750 m3

o Looking local sub-surface lithology it is advisable to construct percolation tank having

suitable size for recharging aquifer through which it may be possible to recharge 690

m3 to 750 m3 rainwater into ground water aquifer

Based on the observation of the field condition Recharge structure like recharge well and Recharge

tank/pond are feasible at this site. Here recharge tank/pond is preferred.


DEMO

Plate 1: Map of Dholka Taluka

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 2: Map showing Sardar Sarovar Project Canal Command

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 3: Map showing project site

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 4: Geological Succession

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 5: Geological Cross Section from Nayakpur to Virpur

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 6: Lithological of deepest piezometer at Ambaliyara

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 7: Lithological of deepest piezometer at Chaloda

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 8: Hydrograph of Chaloda

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Plate 9: Recharge Pond

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Annexure 5

Detail Bio ecology report


DEMO

Ecology and Biodiversity Study As a part of

EIA for Environment Clearance of setting up of two Surface Production facilities of M/s GSPC Limited in CB-ONN/2002/03 in Maroili field at

Village Ambaliyara , District Ahmedabad

June 2013


DEMO

I. Description of the Biological Environment

1.1 Introduction:

Biodiversity is often considered synonymous with species richness of the area.

Identifying, measuring, and monitoring biodiversity is a complex exercise. The

Biodiversity assessment generally concern with, conducting biodiversity

inventories, inventories for assessing existing biodiversity or stock taking. This

provides the information on the biodiversity richness of the area under

consideration. The selection of indicators differs for biodiversity monitoring and

biodiversity inventory based on the output required. Various criteria have been

developed for selection of indicators, taking into account biological as well as

logistical aspects (Noss ,1990, UNEP, 1992).

1.2 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment

Conference of parties to the Convention on Biological diversity (CBD) held at

Curitiba, Brazil on March 20st -31st ,2006 suggested biodiversity to be

considered in impact assessment by providing voluntary guidelines on

biodiversity inclusive Environmental Impact Assessment. CBD provides a strong

international platform for applying impact assessment techniques to biodiversity

conservation. It specifically calls for impact assessment measures to ensure that

biodiversity is addressed in projects, plan and policy decision (Article14). An

underlying justification for the application of impact assessment is also given in

Article -8 which is for promoting the protection of ecosystems, natural habitats,

promoting environmentally sound and sustainable development in areas next to

the protected areas.

1.3 Biological Diversity

The variety and variability of organisms and ecosystems is referred to as

biological diversity or Bio diversity. Biodiversity is a term which has gained

enormous importance in the past few years. Technically, it is a contraction of

'biological diversity'. For the purposes of the CBD (Article 2. Use of Terms),

'Biological Diversity' is "the variability among living organisms from all sources


DEMO

including, inter alia, terrestrial, marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the

ecological complexes of which they are part; this includes diversity within

species, between species and of ecosystems". In practice, 'biodiversity' is most

often used as a collective noun synonymous with nature or 'Life on Earth'

(WCMC Biodiversity Series No 5, 1996).

The biodiversity, we see today is the result of billions of years of evolution,

shaped by natural processes. The vast array of interactions among the various

components of biodiversity makes the planet habitable for all species, including

humans. There is a growing recognition that, biological diversity is a global asset

of tremendous value to present and future generations. At the same time, the

threat to species and ecosystems has never been as great as it is today. Species

extinction caused by human activities continues at an alarming rate. Protecting

biodiversity is for our self-interest and also for the future generation.

1.4 Ecological Impact Assessment:

Ecological impact assessment (EcIA) is used to predict and evaluate the impacts

of development activities on ecosystems and their components, thereby

providing the information needed to ensure that ecological issues are given full

and proper consideration in development planning. Environmental impact

assessment (EIA) has emerged as a key to sustainable development by

integrating social, economic and environmental issues in many countries. EcIA

has a major part to play as a component of EIA but also has other potential

applications in environmental planning and management. Ecological Impact

Assessment provides a comprehensive review of the EcIA process and

summarizes the ecological theories and tools that can be used to understand,

explain and evaluate the ecological consequences of development proposals.

Environmental impact assessments have become an integral part of

development projects in India ever since 1994, to formulate policies and

guidelines for environmentally sound economic development. Proper assessment

of biological environment and compilation of its taxonomical data is essential for

the impact prediction.


DEMO

Consistent and regularly updated data on regional and local taxonomy and

floristic and faunal diversity of the areas are almost non-existent in country as

diverse as India. Instant information on biodiversity profiles of the area, where the

proposed project is setting up, is an essential part of the baseline studies of EIA.

In such a situation, good primary baseline biodiversity survey is a pre-requisite

for the collection of reliable data. The professional ethic of the EIA practitioners

should be their will and skill to conduct scientific field surveys. These

contributions towards biodiversity surveys may sometimes recognized as the

actual value additions in terms of new records or a new data base but are more

often recognized in the validation and updating of the existing information base.

1.5 Period of the study and Study area:

The baseline study for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the

terrestrial environment of the study area was done within 5 km radius of the

proposed two well locations; M1 EPS and M1A1 EPS; located at village

Ambliyara, Taluka Dholka, District Ahmedabad during June, 2013.

1.6 Methodology:

The primary objective of survey was to describe the floristic and faunal

communities within the study area. Extrapolation and prediction techniques was

used to limit the number of sites to be assessed. The knowledge of species

habitats requirement, soil type, terrain, vegetation etc were used to predict

species occurrence.

This Extrapolation assessment Programme conducts preliminary for the

assessment of biological value of poorly known area. The biological value of an

area can be characterized by the species richness, degree of spices endemism,

uniqueness of the ecosystem and magnitude of threats of extinction. This Rapid

biodiversity assessment were undertaken by identifying potentially rich sites from

satellite imaginary (Google Earth) and conducting the field survey in the potential

habitats. GPS was utilized for locating field sample plots as well as gathering

positional attributes of sighted flora and faunal species.

For Floral survey, sample plots of 10 mx10m have been randomly distributed

across the suitable stratum within 5 km radius of the well locations. Tree species


DEMO

were sampled using 10mx10m or 5mx5m plots depending upon the stratum

variability on the ground and tree species occurrenec . For sampling shrub

species two plots of size of 5 meter x 5 meter at two opposite corner of tree plots

or the same 5meterX 5meter plot of tree plots were taken. For herbaceous plant

five plots of 1meter x 1 meter at four corners of tree plots and one at center

The sampling plots for floral inventory were selected randomly in the suitable

habitats within the 5 km radius from the project well locations. The methodology

adopted for faunal survey involve; faunal habitat assessment, random intensive

survey, opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active search for

reptiles, active search for scats and foot prints and review of previous studies.

The aim was to set baselines in order to monitor and identify trends after the

commencement of production system activity. Emphasis has been placed on

presence of rare, endemic, migratory and threatened species, if any present in

the study area. Desktop literature review was conducted to identify the

representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological

communities as listed by IUCN, ZSI, BSI and in Indian wild Life Protection act,

1972. The status of individual species was assessed using the revised IUCN

category system.

1.7 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment:

1.7.1 Habitats description of the project site (Well Location of M1 and M1-A1and its immediate surroundings:

These two well locations, M1 (22045’39.3”, 72030’36.4”), M1-A1 (22045’28.9”,

72030’431” are situated at the out skirt of Ambaliyara village, surrounded by

agricultural fields. The major agriculture activities of this region vary seasonally,

the rice is the major crop during the monsoon period while, and wheat is

cultivated as major crop during winter. The winter crop is entirely depending up

on the availability of water through canal for irrigation. Hence the impact on the

agriculture activity due to the establishment of these EPS will be minimum and

restricted to the foot print of these EPS during the monsoon period. Nearest

habitation is Ambalyira village (22046’11.9”, 72029’49.0”), located almost 1.5 km

from these EPS . As the sites of all these two EPS’s have been already acquired


DEMO

leveled and developed as a part of exploratory drilling, therefore no vegetation

clearing and its direct Ecological impacts are envisaged for this proposed project.. The

nearest water body is a “gram talav” of Ambalyiara village (22045’59.0”, 72029’57.2”).

One patch of scrub land (22045’59.0”, 72029’57.2”) possibly a converted “Goucher land”

was observed in between the agriculture fields, with a good vegetative cover, near the

well location M1 AI. This area harbors now a good population of Nighai and Wild Boars,

which frequently invade the agriculture fields nearby.

Google imaginary snap shot showing 1km radius of the EPS system


DEMO

Google imaginary nap shot showing the immediate surroundings of the EPS

M1

M1-A1


DEMO

1.7.2 Habitats description of the area ( 5 Km):

The proposed Two EPS are located in Ambaliyara village, Dholka taluka of

Ahmedabad district in Gujarat state. The dominant land use pattern of this region was

predominated by agricultural fields. Natural habitats has confined to very limited area.

Many small water bodies like Gram talav were observed in the study area. Sabarmati

River is passing through the NW boundary of the study area between the area falls

under Ahmedabad district and Kheda district.

Google imaginary Snap shot showing General pattern of tree cover in the study area

Patten of tree cover in the study area


DEMO

1.8 Floral Diversity of the study area

The objective this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information

on floristic structure in the study area for formulating effective management and

conservation measures. The climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex

interrelationship and composition of species, which are adapted to these variations, have

resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of each region. The following

account of floral inventory has been, based on the field survey conducted for a short

duration in the June 2013, is not very comprehensive data and is aimed only to give a

general pattern of vegetation of this region during the study period as a baseline data in

absence of available secondary data. Listing of the endangered, threatened and

endemic species of flora in a locality and drawing the attention to the occurrence of such

species, would aid in creating awareness amongst the local people as a whole to protect

such species from extinction, and to take necessary measures for their conservation.

These type of floristic study is an inventory for such purpose and hence a necessity.

The tree species, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, were documented during this

base line study. The list of floral species documented in the study area is enlisted in

Table-1

1.8.1 Trees

The dominant trees in the study area were which are generally planted as the road side

plantation or along the agriculture fields for shades. Otherwise natural tree cover is very

less in this part of Ahmedabad District. Dominant tree species were, Mangifera indica,

Tamarindus indica (Amali), Azadirachta indica (Limbado), Prosopis cineraria (Khyigdo),

Ailanthus excelsa (Aurdso) and Salvadora oleoides (Piludi)

Paddy as the major crop Sabarmathi River flowing through the area


DEMO

The list of tree species is enlisted in the Table-1. 29species of trees belong to 20 families

are enumerated from the study area. Table#1 Trees in the Study area

S. No.

Family & Scientific name Vernacular name

1 Family: Anacardiaceae 1/1 Mangifera indica L. Kari

2 Family: Annonaceae 2/1 Polylathia longifolia (Conn.) Thw. Asopalav 4 Family: Arecaceae 3/1 Cocos nucifera L. Narial 3 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 4/1 Delonix regia (Boj.) Raf. Gaulmor 5/2 Cassia fistula L. Garmalo 6/3 Peltophorum pterocarpum (DC.) Backer ex Heyne Sonmukhi, 7/4 Tamarindus indica L. Amali 4 Family: Caricaceae 8/1 Carica papaya L. Papaya 5 Family: Casuarinaceae 9/1 Casuarina equisetifolia L. Sharu 6 Family: Combretaceae 10/1 Terminalia catappa L. Badam 7 Ehretiaceae 11/1 Cordia gharaf (Forsk.) E. & A. Gundi 8 Euphorbiaceae 12/1 Emblica officinalis Gaertn. Ambla 9 Family: Malvaceae 13/1 Thespesia populnea (L.) Sol.ex Corr. Paras piplo 1 0 Family: Meliaceae 14/1 Azadirachta indica A.Juss Limbado 11 Family: Mimosaceae 15/1 Acacia nilotica (L.) Del.subsp.indica (Bth.) Brenan Baval 16/2 Albizia lebbeck (L.) Bth. Siris 17/3 Pithecellobium dulce (Roxb.) Bth. Gorasmli 18/4 Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce Khyigdo 12 Family:Moraceae 19/1 Ficus benghalensis L. Vad 20/2 Ficus religiosa L. Piplo 13 Family:Moringaceae 21/1 Moringa oleifera Lam Sargavo 14 Family:Myrtaceae 22/1 Eucalyptussp. Nilgari 15 Family Rutaceae 23/1 Limonia acidissima Kothi , Kotha 16 Family:Salvadoraceae 24/1 Salvadora oleoides Decne Piludi 17 Family:Sapotaceae 25/1 Manilkara hexandra (Roxb.) Dub. Rayan 26/2 Manilkara zapota (L.) Chikoo 18 Family:Simaroubaceae 27/1 Ailanthus excelsa Roxb. Aurdso


DEMO

S. No.


19 Family:Rhamnaceae 28/1 Zizyphus glabrata Heyne ex Roth. Bor 20 Family:Verbenaceae 29/1 Tectona grandis L.f. Sag 1.8.2 Shrubs Shrubs observed during the present survey are given in the Table-2. 28 shrub species

belong to 15 families are enumerated from the study area. The dominant shrub

community in this area was represented by, Calotropis procera, C. gigantea (Akado),

Prosopis juliflora (Gando baval), Ipomoea fistulosa (Nasarmo), Lawsonia inermis

(Mendhi),.and Lantana camara (Ganthai). Table 0-1: List of the Shrubs in the study area

S. No.


1 Family :Apocynaceae 1/1 Nerium indicum Lalkaren 2/2 Thevetia peruviana Merr. Pili karan 2 Family: Asclepiadaceae3/1 Calotropis gigantea (L.) R. Br Akado 4/2 Calotropis procera (Ait.) R.Br Akado 3 Family: Caesalpiniaceae5/1 Cassia auriculata L Aval Cassia occidentalis L. Sundro 4 Family: Capparaceae 6/1 Capparis decidua ( forsk.)Edgew Kerdo 7/2 Capparis sepiaria L. Kanthar 5 Family: Convolvulaceae8/1 Ipomoea fistulosa Mart.ex Choisy Nasarmo 6 Family: Euphorbiaceae 9/1 Euphorbia neriifolia L. Thor 10/2 Jatropha curcas L. Ratanjot 11/3 Ricinus communis L. Devalo 7 Family: Lythraceae 12/1 Lawsonia inermis L. Mendhi 8 Family: Malvaceae 13/1 Abelomoschus manihot (L.) Medic. Jagali bhindi 14/2 Abelomoschus esculentus (L.) Bhindi 15/3 Gossypium herbaceum L. acerifolium Kapas 16/4 Hibiscus rosa –sinensis Jasund 17/5 Hibiscus radiates Duno 9 Family: Musaceae 18/1 Musa paradisiaca L. Kela 10 Family: Mimosaceae 19/1 Prosopis juliflora DC Gando baval 11 Family:Nyctaginaceae 20/1 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvel 12 Family: Papilionaceae


DEMO

S. No.


21/1 Sesbania sesban (L.) Merr. Shevari 13 Family: Rhamnaceae 22/1 Zizyphus nummularia (Burm.f.) W. &. Chanibor 14 Family: Solanaceae 23/1 Datura metel L Daturo 24/2 Solanum incanum L Ubhi ringan 25/3 Solanum indicum 15 Family : Verbenaceae 26/1 Clerodendrum inerme (L.) Gaertn. Madhi 27/2 Lantana camara L.var.aculcata (L.)Mold. Ganthai 28/3 Vitex negundo L. Nagod

1.8.3 Herbs

As the study area is dominated by the waterlogged grass lands and paddy fields,

with remarkably rich herbaceous ground cover. The herbs observed in the

sampling plots, during the survey period in the study area have been enlisted in

the Table# 3 77 species of herbs belongs to 30 families were documented from

the sampling plots laid in different habitats. Table #3 List of herbaceous species observed in the area

S. No Family & Scientific name Vernacular name 1 Family Acanthaceae 1/1 Hygrophila auriculata (Schum.) Kanatashelio,Akaro 2 Family: Alismataceae 2/1 Limnophyton obtusifolium L 3 Family Amaranthaceae 3/1 Aerva javanica (Burm.f.)Juss. Bur,Gorakhganjo 4 Family: Apiaceae 4/1 Coriandrum sativum L Kothamir 5/2 Cuminum cuminum L Jiru 6/3 Foeniculum vulgare Mill. Variali 7/4 Trachyspermum ammi L. Ajmo 5 Family : Aponogetonaceae 8/1 Aponogeton natans L. 6 Family: Asteraceae 9/1 Acanthospermum sp. 10/2 Blumea mollis Bhutaco 11/3 Blumea eriantha DC. Kalhar 12/4 Echinops echinatus Roxb Shulio 13/5 Tridax procumbens L Pardesi Bhangro 14/6 Lacunae procumbens (Roxb) .Moti Bhonpatri 15/7 Parthenium hysterophorus L -- 16/8 Xanthium strumarium L. Gokhru 7 Family: Balsiminaceae 17/1 Impatiens balsamina L. var. coccinea 8 Family: Boraginaceae 18/1 Trichodesma indicum R. Br. Undha Fuli


DEMO

S. No Family & Scientific name Vernacular name 9 Family: Commelinaceae 19/1 Commelina benghalensis L 20/2 C.forskalaei Vahl., Enum 10 Family: Convolvulaceae 21/1 Cressa cretica L. Palio, Rudanti 22/2 Convolvulus arvensis L. 23/3 Evolvulus alsinoides (L.) 11 Family: Cyperaceae 24/1 Cyperus sp. -- 25/2 Fimbristylis dichotoma Vahl. -- 26/3 Fimbristylis sp. -- 12 Euphorbiaceae 27/1 Euphorbia hirta L. -- 13 Family: Gentianaceae 28/1 Nymphoides indicum (Roxb.) Kumudini 22/2 N. parvifolium (Griseb.) -- 14 Family: Hydrocharitaceae 29/1 Hydrilla verticillata (L.f.) Royle 30/2 Vallisneria spiralis L. 31/3 Ottelia alismodies L. 15 Family: Lamiaceae 32/1 Leucas aspera Wild Kubi 33/2 Ocimum basilicum L 34/3 Ociumum sanctum L tulsi 16 Family: Liliaceae 35/1 Aloe barbadensis Mill. Kunvarpato 17 Family: Malvaceae 36/1 Abutilon indicum L. Khapat,Dabaliar 37/2 Sida sp. -- 38/3 Pavonia sp. 39/4 Myrtyniaceae 40/5 Martynia annua L. Vinchhudo 41/6 Lentibulariaceae 42/7 Utricularia sp. 18 Family: Nyctaginaceae 43/1 Boerhavia diffusa L. Satodi 19 Family: Nymphaeaceae 44/1 Nymphaea pubescens Wild Kamal 20 Family: Papilionaceae 45/1 Alysicarpus vaginalis 46/2 Cajanus cajan (L) Tuvar 47/3 Cortalaria prostate 48/4 Cortalaria juncea Shun 49/5 Indigofera cardifoila Heyne ex Roth 50/6 Indigofera oblongifolia Forks. -- 51/7 Indigofera sp. 52/8 Tehrosia purpurea L. Sarpankho 53/9 Tephrosia sps. -- 54/10 Medicago sativa L Lachko 55/11 Cacia tora Kuvandio 21 Family: Poaceae 56/1 Aleuropus lagopoides (L) --


DEMO

S. No Family & Scientific name Vernacular name 57/2 Cynodon barberi Rang. -- 58/3 Cynodon dactylon (L.) -- 59/4 Oryza sativa L. Chokha 60/5 Phragmites kara (Retz.) -- 61/6 Triticum aestivum L. Ghau 62/7 Sorghum bicolor (L.) Jowar 63/8 Zea mays Makai 22 Family: Poligonaceae 64/1 Poligonum sp. 23 Family: Pontederiaceae 65/1 Eichhornia crassipes (Mart.) Kanphutti 24 Family: Potamogetonaceae 66/1 Potomogetonsp. 25 Family: Solanaceae 67/1 Solanum indicum L. Ringni 68/2 Solanum nigrum L. Piludi 69/3 Solanum surattense Brum. Bhoringni 70/4 Lyxopersicon lycopersicum Tamata 26 Family: Scrophulariaceae 71/1 Bacopa monnier L. 27 Family: Tiliaceae 72/1 Corchorus depressus Stocks Bhuphali 73/2 Corchorus aestunans L. Chunch 28 Family: Trapaceae 74/1 Trapa natans L. bispinosa (Roxb.) 29 Family: Typhaceae 75/1 Typha angustata Bory & Chaub Ramban,Ghabajariu 30 Family: Zygophyllaceae 76/1 Fagonia cretica L. -- 77/2 Tribulus terrestris L. Mithu Gokhru

1.8.4 Climbers and Twiners

Climbers/ twiners in the study area dominated by, Ipomoea pes-tigridis

(Wagpadi), Ipomea pes-caprae (Dariani vel), Ipomea aquatica (Nali ni Bhaji),

Coccinia grandis (Ghiloda), Luffa cylindrica (Galku), and Abrus precatorius

(Chanothai). The major climbers and twiners observed in the study area in the

sampling plots are given in the Table-2. 25 species of climbers/ twiners belongs

to 8 families are recorded from the area

Table-2: List of Climbers observed in the area

S. No


1 Family: Asclepiadaceae 1/1 Pentatropis spiralis (Forsk.) Decne Shingroti 2/2 P. capensis L. Shingroti 3/3 Oxystelma secamone L. Jal –Dudhi


DEMO

S. No


4/4 Pergularia daemia 9Firsk . Chamer Dudheli 2 Family: Convolvulaceae 5/1 Ipomea cairica (L.) -- 6/2 Ipomea nili L. 7/3 Ipomoea obscura L. -- 8/4 Ipomea pulchella Roth -- 9/5 Ipomea aquatica Forsk. Nadanivel 10/6 Ipomoea pes-caprae Dariani vel/Maryad vel 11/7 Ipomoea pes-tigrides L 3 Family: Caesalpiniaceae 12/1 Caesalpinia crista L. Kachka 4 Family: Cucurbitaceae 13/1 Coccinia grandis Ghiloda 14/2 Corallocarpus epigeus (Arn.0 Cl.in HK. 15/3 Luffa cylindrica (L.) M.J.Roem Galku 16/4 L. acutangula (L) Jungli turia 17/5 Mukia maderaspatana (L)M. Roeam Chnak Chibidi 5 Family: Cuscutaceae 18/1 Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarvel 6 Euphorbiaceae 19/1 Dalechampia scanens L. 7 Family: Menispermaceae 20/1 Cocculus hirsutus (L.) Diels Vevdi 21/2 Tinospora cordifolia (Willd.) Miers Galo 8 Family: Papilionaceae 22/1 Mucuna prurita Hk.f. Kavach, Koyli 23/2 Abrus precatorius L. Chanothi 24/3 Clitoria ternatea L. Gokaran 25/4 Clitoria biflora Dalz.

1.9 Cultivated Plants in the study area

The agricultural practices has occupied the majority of available the landscape.

The major agriculture activities of this region vary seasonally, the rice (Oryza

sativa) is the major crop during the monsoon period while, and wheat (Triticum

aestivum) is cultivated as major crop during winter. The crop occupying the

highest percentage of the sown area of this region is taken as the major crop and

all other possible alternative crops which are sown in this region either as

substitutes of the base crop in the same season or as the crops which fit in the

rotation in the subsequent season, are considered as minor crop.

1.9.1 Major Crops

Major crops in the study area are Rice (Oryza sativa L.) and Wheat (Triticum

aestivum)


DEMO

1.9.2 Minor crops

The minor crops of this region are Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides), and Jowar

(Sorghum bicolar)

1.9.3 Vegetable:

Many villages in the study area are actively engaged in the cultivation of Bhindi

(Abelmoschus esculentus), especially at Navapura village, Chandisar village, Ambliyara

village

1.9.4 Horticulture Practices and fruit grown

Horticulture activity is not much developed in this region of Ahmedabad district

1.10 Rare and Endangered flora in the study area

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global

conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to

evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These

criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong

scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide

to the status of biological diversity.

Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any

threat category, by RED data book of Indian Plants. (Nayar and Sastry,1990) and

Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN,2010, BSI, 2003)

1.11 Endemic plants of the study area

De Candolle (1855) first used the concept of “Endemic”, which is defined as an

area of a taxonomic unit, especially a species which has a restricted distribution

or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region through geographical, ecological

or temporal barriers.

Among recorded plant species, during the survey period, none can be assigned

the status of endemic plant of this region.

1.12 Status of Forest and their category in the study area

No natural forest land was observed in the study area except few scattered scrub

cover in the barren lands and area demarcated for grazing.


DEMO

1.13 Faunal Biodiversity in the study area

For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to

birds, reptiles, amphibians, and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been

conducted in June, 2013

1.13.1 Birds of the study area:

The most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Darter, Cattle Egret,

Intermediate Egret, Little Egret, Indian Cormorant, Black-winged Stilt, Red-

wattled Lapwing, Red-naped Ibis, Brahmyni Myna , and White-breasted Water

hen,Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of

occurrence is given in the Table #5


DEMO

Table# 5 Systematic List of birds in the study area with its residential status Old Common name New Common Name Scientific Name R-S I ORDER: APODIFORMES Family: Apodidae (swifts) Common Swift Common Swift Apus apus R II ORDER: FALCONIFORMES Family: Accipitridae (vulture, Sparrow hawk, Eagle, Harrier, Kite and Vulture) Shikra Shikra Accipiter badius R Black-winged Kite Black-winged Kite Elanus caeruleus R III. ORDER: : CICONIIFORMES Family: Anhingidae

Darter or Snake Birds Oriental Darter Anhinga melanogaster R

Family: Ardeidae (heron, Egret, Bittern)Pond Heron Indian Pond-Heron Ardeola grayii R Cattle Egret Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R

Median or Smaller Egret Intermediate Egret Mesophoyx intermedia Egretta intermedia R


DEMO

Old Common name New Common Name Scientific Name R-S Little Egret Little Egret Egretta garzetta R

Large Egret Great Egret Casmerodius albus Ardea alba RW

Family: Charadriidae (Plover, Stilt, Oystercatcher, Lapwing, Avocet )Black-winged Stilt Black-winged Stilt Himantopus himantopus R Red-wattled Lapwing Red-wattled Lapwing Vanellus indicus R Family: Ciconiidae (Open bill, stork, Adjutant)Openbill stork Asian Open bill Anastomus oscitans R Painted stork Painted stork Mycteria leucocephala R Family: Jacanidae (Jacana) Pheasant-tailed Jacana Pheasant-tailed Jacana Hydrophasianus chirurgus Family: Phalacrocoracidae ( Cormorant)Indian Shag Indian Cormorant Phalacrocorax fuscicollis R Little Cormorant Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger R Family: Pteroclidae (Sandgrouse)

Indian Sandgrouse Chestnut-bellied sandgrouse

Pterocles exustus R

Family: Threskiornithidae (Spoonbill and Ibis)Black Ibis Red-naped Ibis Pseudibis papillosa R IV ORDER: COLUMBIFORMES Family: Columbidae (Pigeon, Dove)Blue Rock Pigeon Rock Pigeon Columba livia R Ring Dove Eurasian Collared-Dove Streptopelia decaocto R Rufous Turtle Dove Oriental Turtle-Dove Streptopelia orientalis R V : ORDER: CORACIFORMES Family: Dacelonidae (King fishers)White breasted Kingfisher White-throated Kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis R Family: Cerylidae Pied Kingfisher Pied Kingfisher Ceryle rudis Family: Coraciidae (Roller) BlueJay or Roller Indian Roller Coracias benghalensis R Family: Meropidae (Bee Eater) Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Chestnut-headed Bee-eater Merops leschenaulti R VI. ORDER: CUCULIFORMES Family: Centropodidae (Cocucal)Crow-Pheasant or Coucal Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis R Family: Cuculidae (Cuckoo, Koel)Koel Asian Koel Eudynamys scolopacea R Indian Drongo Cuckoo Drongo Cuckoo Surniculus lugubris R VII. ORDER: GALLIFORMES Family: Phasianidae (Peafowl , Partridge, Quail, francolin, spur fowl, jungle fowl, Monal)Common Peafowl Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus R Family: Gruidae (Crane) Sarus Crane Sarus Crane Grus antigone R Family: Rallidae ( Waterhen, coot, crake water cock, Moorhen, Rail,)White-breasted Water hen White-breasted Water hen Amaurornis phoenicurus R Purple Moorhen Purple Swamp hen Porphyrio porphyrio R Indian Moorhen Indian Moorhen Gallinula chloropus R VIII . ORDER: PASSERIFORMES Family: Paridae (Tit ) Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R Family: Corvidae Large Cuckoo-shrike Large Cuckoo-shrike Coracina macei R


DEMO

Old Common name New Common Name Scientific Name R-S Coracina novaehollandiae

Raven Common Raven Corvus corax R House Crow House Crow Corvus splendens R Tree Pie Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda R Golden-Oriole Eurasian Golden-Oriole Oriolus oriolus Family: Laniidae (shrike) Rufous backed Shrike Long-tailed Shrike Lanius schach R Grey Shrike Northern Shrike Lanius excubitor R Family: Muscicapidae ( Short wing, Chat, Robin, ShamaIndian Robin Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata R Pied Bushchat Pied Bush chat Saxicola caprata R Family: Nectariniidae ( Sun Birds, Flower pecker, Spider hunter )Purple Sunbird Purple Sunbird Nectarinia asiatica R Small Sunbird Crimson-backed Sunbird Nectarinia minima R Family: Passeridae ( Avadavat, Pipit, Wagtail, Munia, Snow finch, sparrow, weaver ,Accentor)House Sparrow House Sparrow Passer domesticus R Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R Family: Pycnonotidae (Bulbul, ) Red-vented Bulbul Red-vented Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R Family: Sturnidae (Myna, Starling)Bank Myna Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R Brahminy Myna Brahminy Starling Sturnus pagodarum RIndian Myna Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R Family: Sylviidae ( Warbler, Browning, Fulvetta ,Babbler, Laughing thrash, Tailor birds,Common Babbler Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R Jungle Babbler Jungle Babbler Turdoides striatus R Tailorbird Common Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius R IX. ORDER: PSITTACIFORMES Family: Psittacidae (Parrot and Parakeet)Rose-ringed Parakeet Rose-ringed Parakeet Psittacula krameri R Note: R = Widespread Resident, r= Very Local Resident, RW =Resident and winter visitor Ref WCMC, Check list of Indian Birds Kumar, A., J.P. Sati and P.C. Tak (2003): Checklist of Indian Water birds. BUCEROS 8 (1): 30 pp 1.13.2 Butterflies from the study area: Butterflies observed during the present study are documented in the Table #6

Table # 6 Butterflies in the study area # Scientific name & family Common name 1 Family Papilionidae 1/1 Papilio polytes Linnaeus Common Mormon 2 Family: Pieridae 2/1 Eurema hecabe Linnaeus Common Grass yellow 3/2 Catopsilia pomona Fabricius Common Emigrant 4/3 Catopsilia pyranthe Linnaeus Mottled Emigrant 5/4 Ixias mariane Cramer White orange tip 6/5 Ixias pyrene Linnaeus Yellow orange tip 2 Family: Nymphalidae 7/1 Danaus genutia Cramer Stripped Tiger 8/2 Hypolimanas misippus Linnaeus Danaid egg fly 9/3 Mycalesis perseus Fabricius Common bush brown


DEMO

1.13.3. Herpetofauna : Reptiles document in the region is given in the Table #7

Table#7 Reptiles in the study area # Scientific name Common name 1 Calotes versicolor (Daudin) Common garden lizard 2 Ptyas mucosus (Linn.) Common rat snake 3 Varanus bengalensis ( Daudin) Common Indian monitor 4 Eutropis carinata (Schneider) Brahminy skink 5 Hemidactylus flaviviridis (Ruppell) House Gecko 6 Sitana ponticeriana ( Cuvier) Fan-Throated Lizard 7 Naja naja (Linn.) Indian Cobra 8 Daboia russelii ( Shaw and Nodder) Russell’s Viper 9 Bungarus caeruleus ( Schneider Common Indian Krait

= Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers ,during the interaction

with them with pictorial presentation.

1.13.4. Mammals: The wild mammals observed other than domesticated ones from study area is documented in the Table #8

Table #8 : Mammals in the study area S. No Scientific name Common Name 1 Mus booduga (Gray) Indian field mouse

2 Herpestes edwardsi (Geoffroy) Common Mongoose

3 Lepus sp. Hare

4 Funambulus pennanii ( Wroughton) Five striped Palm squirrel

5 Boselaphus tragocamelus (Pallas) Nilgai

6 Semnopithecus entellus (Dufresne) Bengal Hanuman Langur,

7 Sus scrofa Linnaeus Wild Boars

= Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers ,during the interaction with them with pictorial presentation.

1.14. Rare and Endangered fauna of the study area:

1.14.1 As per IUCN RED (2010) list

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global

conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the

extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all

species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is

recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.


DEMO

A taxon is Near Threatened, when it has been evaluated against the criteria but does not

qualify for Critically Endangered, Endangered or Vulnerable categories, but is close to

qualifying or is likely to qualify for a threatened category in the near future. As per IUCN

Red list of threatened species (2012),among the sighted animal species (Grus antigone)

Sarus Crane is cataegorized as vulnerable, two birds are grouped under near threatened

category Painted stork (Mycteria leucocephala), Oriental Darter(Anhinga melanogaster )

None of them sited with in 1km radius from the well location. Table # 9 Threatened, Near Threatened and Vulnerable birds of the study area

Species Habitat Location Coordinates Number Threat status (IUCN,2012)

Sarus Crane (Grus Antigone)

Shallow Water bodies, Paddy Fields

Sarthal Village

220 43’ 39.2” 720 29’ 35.1” Two Vulnerable

ver. 3.1

Painted stork (Mycteria leucocephala)

Shallow water bodies, Trees near water bodies

Rajpur Village

220 45’ 37.0” 720 29’ 22.7.”

Four Near threatened ver.3.1

Oriental Darter (Anhinga melanogaster)

Shallow water bodies, Paddy fields

Sarthal Village Near GIDC Dholka

220 43’ 42.8” 720 29’ 47.7.1” 220 42’ 51.6” 720 28’ 20.3”

One one

Near threatened ver.3.1

Source: IUCN Red list of threatened species, 2012. and Bird life international 2010 1.14.2 As per Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972

Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide

for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith

or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental

security of the country.

Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life

(Protection)Act,1972 by including them in different schedules .Among the birds in the

study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in schedule I .of Wild life protection Act

(1972), while many other birds are included in schedule IV.

Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja), and Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus)

were provided protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life protection act, (1972).

Among mammals; Bengal hanuman langur (Semnopithecus entellus (Dufresne) and

Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), are a schedule –II mammals. Nilgai

(Boselaphus tragocamelus) and Wild Boars (Sus scrofa Linnaeus are provided


DEMO

protection by incorporating them in schedule–III, is a Schedule -II mammal. Hares and

five stripped squirrels are included in schedule IV of Wild Life Protection act 1972. Table#10 : Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act 1972

Group Species Schedule

Birds Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), schedule I

Most of other birds Schedule-IV

Reptiles Indian Cobra (Naja naja), Schedule-II

Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) Schedule-II

Mammals

Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), Schedule-II

Five striped Palm squirrel

(Funambulus pennanii ( Wroughton)) Schedule-IV

Hare (Lepus sp.) Schedule-IV

Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) Schedule-III

Bengal Hanuman Langur, (Semnopithecus

entellus (Dufresne)

Schedule-II

Wild Boars (Sus scrofa Linnaeus Schedule-III


DEMO

1.15 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

S. No

Potential Impacts Comments

1 Habitat Change /Habitat loss As all these two Development wells are located in the already procured land during the exploratory drilling operation No conversion of the land is required for the development of these wells. Moreover no additional footprint is required for the establishment of these Early production systems. Proper Preparation planning should include consideration of eventual decommissioning and restoration.

2 Habitat disturbances Some disturbances envisaged due to long term occupation and permanent structure. Consider locating all facilities at single site to minimize foot print.

3 Displacement No impact 4 Blockage of area No impact 5 Breeding area No breeding area near the identified EPS

No impact 6 Migratory area No impact 7 Herbivores grazing pattern Originally Agriculture land not meant for

grazing, no impact 8 Removal of vegetation Minimum vegetation removal,

10 Lighting and Camp activities Long term , transient impact Light sources should be properly shaded and directed onto site area. To avoid disturbances to the animals and local people.

11 Road construction vegetation clearing Existing road network available no impact 12 Access Permanent long term access routes

required. Appropriate design and management plan required in particular to long term disturbances from vehicular traffic volume and density in terms of environmental receptors (agriculture fields) and local population.

13 Site preparation vegetation clearing Already developed area during exploratory drilling

14 Flaring impact All the flaring should be elevated flare to protect the surrounding crops Flaring of produced gas is the most significant source of air emission, flaring may occur on occasions as safety measures also

15 Operation phase :Air Emission The primary source of atmospheric emission from operation well arise from

• Faring, venting and purging gases


DEMO

• Diesel engines • Air borne particulates from soil

disturbances during construction and from vehicular traffic

Principal emission include carbon monoxide , Carbon dioxide , VOC, and nitrogen oxides and sulphur dioxides During production, increased level of emission occurs in the immediate vicinity of operation. The agriculture fields surrounding these EPS likely to be subjected to the affected directly due to these emissions.

16

Operation phase Terrestrial Impacts

Potential impact to the soil arise from two basic sources

• Physical disturbances as a result of construction

• Contamination resulting from spillage, leakage

Simple preventive techniques such as segregated and contained drainage system, for process area incorporating sumps and oil traps , leak minimization measures, and drip pans should be incorporated in maintenance procedure Such measures will effectively remove any potential impact arising from small spills and leakage on site.


DEMO

1.16 CONSERVATION PLAN FOR THREATENED FAUNA 1.16.1 Conservation plan for Sarus Crane (IUCN Categorized Vulnerable species)

Sarus Crane (Grus antigone) is a large non migratory bird found in Indian sub-continent,

South Asia and Australia. The tallest of flying bids standing at a height of up to 5.9 ft.

They are conspicuous and iconic species of open wetlands. The Sarus crane can be

easily distinguished by other cranes in the region by the overall grey color and the

contrasting red color head and upper neck. They forage on marshes and shallow

wetlands for roots, tubers, insects, crustaceans and small vertebrates prey. Like other

cranes they form long lasting pair bonds and maintain territories within which they

perform territorial and courtship display which includes loud trumpeting, leaps and dance

like movement. In India they are considered symbol of marital fidelity. The main breeding

season is during rainy season. The neck and head is brighter during the breeding

season.

Sarus Crane Survey

Buffer zone of the study area has been reported as a habitat of Sarus crane as the wide

spread agriculture field with paddy cultivation. More efforts made to assess their habitat,

in the study area. The core zone (1 km of each well location) and buffer zone (5 km

radius area of the each well location) was examined to understand the status of the

Sarus crane in this region.

Habitat and Ecology: Sarus cranes are mostly non-migratory in India. The Indian Sarus Cranes (Grus

Antigone) have adapted to the dense human population in India, and interact closely

with people in areas where traditions of tolerance prevail. Throughout their range Sarus

Cranes utilize a wide variety of landscapes, depending on food availability, cropping

patterns, and other seasonal factors. Their optimal habitat includes a combination of

small seasonal marshes, floodplains, human-altered ponds, fallow and cultivated lands(

paddy fields). Often they focus their foraging on underground tubers of native wetland

vegetation such as Eleocharis spp.

Breeding pairs place their nests in a wide variety of natural wetlands, along canals and

irrigation ditches, beside village ponds, and in rice fields. Compared to other crane

species, Sarus Cranes will utilize open areas where wetlands occur as well as in open


DEMO

grasslands more so than other crane species. Where possible, the nests are located in

shallow water, where short emergent vegetation is dominant. For nesting, use of human-

dominated wetlands is most common in India.

Mated pairs of cranes, including Sarus Cranes, engage in unison calling, which is a

complex and extended series of calls where male and female vocalizations differ but are

coordinated. The birds stand in a specific posture, usually with their heads thrown back

and beaks skyward during the display. In Sarus Cranes the female initiates the display

and utters two calls for each male call. The male always lifts up his wings over his back

during the unison call while the female keeps her wings folded at her sides. All cranes

engage in dancing, which includes various behaviors such as bowing, jumping, running,

stick or grass tossing, and wing flapping. Dancing can occur at any age and is commonly

associated with courtship; however, it is generally believed to strengthen the pair bond.

Nests of all Sarus Cranes consist of wetland vegetation. In India, nests located in

flooded rice paddies are constructed entirely of rice stalks. Indian Sarus Cranes breed

primarily during the rains, with few pairs breeding outside this season in response to

chick loss and creation of nesting habitat due to flooding caused by irrigation canals.

Females usually lay two eggs and incubation (by both sexes) lasts 31-34 days. The male

takes the primary role in defending the nest against possible danger. Chicks fledge (first

flight) at 50-65 days Habitat in the study area

No Sarus crane found in the core zone of the two EPS. One direct sighting of a pair

Sarus crane were done in the paddy fields near the Sarthal village (220 43’ 39.2” ,720

29’ 35.1”) located in the outskirt of the study area . Day time they are moving mainly in

the agriculture fields and shallow water bodies or muddy areas.


DEMO

General Food Habits

All cranes are omnivorous. Sarus Cranes feed on aquatic plants such as tubers of

sedges (such as Eleocharis spp.), invertebrates, grains, small vertebrates, and insects Threats in the study area:

The globally threatened Sarus Crane (Grus antigone) occurs mostly in landscapes

dominated by agriculture; it is therefore vulnerable to extinction caused by human-

related disturbance and mortality. The Sarus Crane's increased use of rice paddies as

breeding habitat has fueled concerns that the species is being forced to use suboptimal

habitats.

Change is land use, especially the shift to cultivation to other cash crops instead of

paddy along with losses in wetland have led to the decline of the species. Indiscriminate

use of pesticides, high-tension electric cables and hunting for meat will have contributed

towards the bird's decline

Wetland loss and degradation are critical problems throughout the range of Sarus

Cranes. Destruction of wetlands due to agricultural expansion, however, is increasing

dramatically and poses a significant threat as well. These threats reflect increasing

human population pressures .The future of the Indian Sarus Crane is closely tied to the

quality of small wetlands in India that experience heavy human use, such as: high rates

of sewage inflow, extensive agricultural runoff, high levels of pesticide residues, and

intensification of agricultural systems.

Unique to this area in Gujarat especially in the Ahmedabad, Anand and Kheda district is

that ,favorable attitudes of farmers still allow Sarus Cranes to nest in rice paddies.

Vegetation changes and disturbance during crop harvesting likely decreased brood

survival. Maintaining a patchwork of shallow wetlands in rice-dominated landscapes and

ensuring that farmers retain a positive attitude toward the species are crucial for survival

of Sarus Crane nests and broods.

The Indian Sarus Crane has proven to be highly adaptable in the face of high human

population pressures. The birds are able to use even small wetlands if they are not

persecuted or heavily disturbed. Breeding pairs and families with pre-fledged chicks are

typically dispersed among scattered natural and artificial wetlands. Adult pairs will use

drier habitats such as cultivated and fallow fields.

More over Local traditions and religious beliefs have protected the species in many parts

of its range,


DEMO

Study Area as a Sarus Crane Habitat– Conclusion

In the Present survey of Sarus crane in both core zone and buffer zone indicates that

Sarus cranes are not observed in the core zone of the study area as these two wells,

which are located closer to the village Ambaliyara. Only one sighting occurred during the

survey period near Sarthal Village located far away from the development wells.

The villagers are also well aware of Sarus crane habitat and habits. In study area also

they are using only wet marsh of paddy fields for their feeding and breeding activities.

Above study of Sarus crane indicates that proposed project will not have any significant

impact on the Sarus crane in terms of their normal movement, activities and habitat.

However it is necessary to take some management option like habitat improvement in

the project site. So the habitat improvement Programme will be undertaken in different

part of the study area. Conservation through habitat improvement and awareness

Education and Training

• Public education programs involving the Sarus Crane have special opportunities to

emphasize the uniqueness of the Sarus Crane as the world’s tallest flying bird; the

importance of wetland conservation and sustainable use of wetland resources.

• Develop local school programs that focus on the biology of cranes, threats to cranes,

minimizing of human impacts, and prevention of egg-stealing and chick-capturing.

• Support farmer education and extension programs to improve farm practices and to

provide information about sustainable agricultural practices and the importance of

wetlands.

• Conflicts with farmers in the state are another cause for the declining population of

the birds.

• "Sarus being a bird in the habitat outside the forested landscape is often

encountered in agricultural fields and hence the people's attitude to Sarus is of

significant importance. Destruction of Sarus nests, stilling of eggs, occasional

hunting, mortality related to power lines have been the direct threats to Sarus.

But it is clear that serious steps need to be taken in the state to save India's only

resident, breeding crane from extinction.


DEMO

1.16.2 Conservation Measures for Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) Schedule –I bird species

No other fauna that falls under the scheduled-I category was reported from the study

area except Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) . the rest of the fauna reported

from the study area, falls under either in schedule-II, Schedule-III or Schedule-IV of the

wild Life Protection Act 1972. Most of these species are not conservation dependant in

Gujarat, and they are proliferating itself in its own habitats. Few of them like Nilgai and

wild boar has become threat to the farmers as they are invading their cops very

frequently in this region. Hence conservation measures are not provided for these

animals

Peacock or Indian peafowl (Pavo cristatus) is a very familiar bird of Gujarat also

recognized as National Bird of India. The few population of this pheasant was reported

from the some villages of the study area.. The male peacock is predominantly blue with

a fan-like crest of spatula-tipped wire-like feathers and is best known for the long train


DEMO

made up of elongated upper-tail; these stiff and elongated feathers are raised into a fan

and quivered in a display during courtship. The female lacks this feathers

Description:

The male, known as a peacock, is a large bird with a length from bill to tail of 100 to

115 cm (40 to 46 inches) and to the end of a fully grown train as much as 195 to 225 cm

(78 to 90 inches) and weigh 4–6 kg (8.8–13.2 lbs). The females, or peahens, are smaller

at around 95 cm (38 inches) in length and weigh 2.75–4 kg (6–8.8 lbs). Indian Peafowl

are among the largest and heaviest representatives of the Phasianidae family. Their

size, colour and shape of crest make them unmistakable within their native distribution

range. The male is metallic blue on the crown, the feathers of the head being short and

curled. The fan-shaped crest on the head is made of feathers with bare black shafts and

tipped with blush-green webbing. A white stripe above the eye and a crescent shaped

white patch below the eye are formed by bare white skin. The sides of the head have

iridescent greenish blue feathers. The back has scaly bronze-green feathers with black

and copper markings. The scapular and the wings are buff and barred in black, the

primaries are chestnut and the secondaries are black. The tail is dark brown and the

"train" is made up of elongated upper tail coverts (more than 200 feathers, the actual tail

has only 20 feathers) and nearly all of these feathers end with an elaborate eye-spot. A

few of the outer feathers lack the spot and end in a crescent shaped black tip. The

underside is dark glossy green shading into blackish under the tail. The thighs are buff

coloured. The male has a spur on the leg above the hind toe.

Peacocks are polygamous, and the breeding season is spread out but appears to be

dependent on the rains. Several males may congregate at a lek site and these males are

often closely related. Males at lek appear to maintain small territories next to each other

and they allow females to visit them and make no attempt to guard harems. Females do

not appear to favour specific males.

Peafowl are omnivorous and eat seeds, insects, fruits, and reptiles. A large percentage

of their food is made up of the fallen berries .Around cultivated areas, peafowl feed on a

wide range of crops such as groundnut, tomato, paddy, etc. Around human habitations,

they feed on a variety of food scraps. In the countryside, it is particularly partial to crops

and garden plants

Habitat:

The Indian Peafowl is found mainly on the ground in open scrub forest or on land under

cultivation where they forage for berries, grains but will also prey on snakes, lizards, and


DEMO

small rodents. Their loud calls make them easy to detect, and in forest areas often

indicate the presence of a predator such as a tiger. They forage on the ground in small

groups and will usually try to escape on foot through undergrowth and avoid flying,

though they will fly into tall trees to roost. The bird has a celebrated status in Indian

mythology, and hence protected culturally in India especially in Gujarat. The Indian

Peafowl is listed as Least Concern by IUCN.

Status in the study area:

No peacock was sighted in the projects site. All the direct sightings of the peacock were

located near the agriculture lands and near habitations. This species is well adapted to

natural village environment setting. Day time they temporarily move towards the

surrounding agriculture areas for feeding while during night time they roost on the trees

present in the village and in the agriculture hedges Threats in the Study Area

No perceptible threats were identified in the villages surveyed. Village residents are

against hunting or poaching of the peafowl, due to culture and mythology reasons. Adult

peafowl can usually escape ground predators by flying into trees. Foraging in groups

provides some safety as there are more eyes to look out for predators Conservation through Habitat Improvement and Awareness.

Habitat improvement programme will be undertaken through plantation of suitable tree

species in the surrounding villages. While selecting the tree/ shrub species care shall be

provided for beery plants which attract these birds.

During summer period, villagers will be encouraged to use the old earthen pots to fill with

water for drinking these birds

Summer is the time when these. birds are facing shortage of feeds, there by supplying

the feed like Bajri, Juwar, Maize to the identified villages will suffix the problem of food

shortage. The proponent can directly supply these feed to the villages directly or by

funding to the NGOs active in this mission.


DEMO

Annexure 6

Detail Land use report


DEMO

Satellite Data Analysis and Interpretation within 10 Km Area for project site of Oil Exploration Project by GSPC at Ambliyara village in Ahmedabad District, Gujarat Submitted To: DeTox Corporation Pvt. Ltd., Surat

Prepared By: Enviro-GIS Services, Vadodara

Submission Date: 24th August, 2013


DEMO

August, 2013 Enviro-GIS Service

Land use/cover study 2

1. Introduction and Background

1.1 Project Proponent Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited (GSPC) has been established in year

1979 as a Government of Gujarat undertaking and is involved in exploration and

production of Oil and Gas.

GSPC has grown from being an operator of small fields in Gujarat into an expensive

oil and gas exploration and production company across India. Its rise in the

hydrocarbon sector was helped by the Central Government’s opening of the sector

to private participation in the early 1990s. GSPC constructed India’s first and only

Land Based Drilling Platform in the Hazira gas field in 1998, through which gas is

being supplied to various industries across Gujarat.

In the last few years GSPC has played a pioneering role in the development of the

Nation’s hydrocarbon resources, most notably, with its discoveries in the Krishna-

Godavari Basin (Offshore).

1.2 Product Profile GSPC Limited now proposes to establish two Surface Production Systems (EPS) at

Village: Ambliyara, Taluka: Dholka, District Ahmedabad.

Table 1: Product Profile

Proposed wellsProducts

M-1 M 1 A-1

Crude oil 2-4 m3/day 2-4 m3/day Associate Gas 100-150 m3/day 120-200 m3/day

1.3 Project Background The proposed wells i.e EPS#M1 and M1A1 fall under the drilling block CB-ONN-

2002/3 under NELP IV Sanand Miroli Block in Cambay Basin. Company has

obtained environment clearance for the drilling activity from MoEF vide letter no. F.

No. J-11011/1046/2007-IA-II (I) dated 07th February 2007. Accordingly GSPC

Limited had executed the drilling of 17 wells in block CB-ONN-2002/3 and based on

the availability of oil, company has decided to start production activity at the


DEMO



proposed well locations i.e M-1 and M 1 A-1 by establishing EPS (Surface

Production System).

1.4 Regulatory Framework The proposed project is considered as category ‘A’ project and listed in Sr. no. 1 (b)

of EIA notification dated 14th September, 2006 and accordingly application for

Environment Clearance has been made to MoEF.

1.5 Salient features of site The salient features of site are as noted in Table 2

Table 2: Salient Features of Site EPS well M 1 M 1 A1 Survey no. 832,833,835,836,838 827, 828 Village Taluka District State

Ambliyara Dholka Ahmedabad Gujarat

Type of land Land already procured by GSPC Limited Total land acquired 19410.81 sq.m 14917.10 sq.m Latitude of project site Longitude of project site

22°45’38.30”N 72º30’35.20” E

22°45’27.78”N 72º30’44.34” E

Nearest road connectivity NH 8 : ∼ 8 Km and NH 8A:~13 km Nearest rail connectivity Ahmedabad station

Approx 30 Km Ahmedabad station Approx 31 Km

Nearest habitation Approx 1.30 Km Approx 1.68 Km Nearest Lake/ pond/ reservoir/ canal

Lake: approx 0.70 Km

Lake: approx 0.74 Km

Nearest city Ahmedabad Ahmedabad Source of water Tanker water/

Ground water Tanker water/ Ground water

Source of electricity State Electricity Board Any Protected areas notified under Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, Notified Eco sensitive area, Interstate boundary in 5 Km radius

None within 5 Km radius

Critically polluted area None within 10 Km radius


DEMO



1.6 Need of the Project The proposed project is aimed at increasing the production towards filling the gap

between national crude oil demand and supply. Also it will help in meeting the

energy requirements of the nation and generate employment opportunities.

1.7 Land Area Break up The detailed land area break up for the proposed project site is as mentioned below:

Table 3: Land area break up

Purpose Land area for M 1 Land area for M 1 A1 Build up area 678 sq m 550 sq mOpen area 12326.8 sq m 9444.1 sq mGreen belt area 6406 sq m 4923 sq m Total area 19410.81 sq.m 14917.10 sq.m

Green belt development shall be done in phase wise manner wherein initially 10 %

green belt shall be developed and in later stage of project the same shall be

expanded.

Table 4: Green belt development plan

EPS Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 M 1 1941.08 sq m 1941.08 sq m 2523.84 sq m M 1 A 1 1491.71 sq m 1491.71 sq m 1939.58 sq m


DEMO



2 Process Description

2.1 Product details GSPC Limited proposes to establish EPS at Village: Ambliyara, District: Ahmedabad

with the production capacity as motioned in Table


M-1 M 1 A-1 Crude oil 2-4 m3/day 2-4 m3/day Associate Gas 100-150 m3/day 120-200 m3/day

2.2 Fuel details Fuel used will be mainly in form of diesel for operation of stand by DG sets. The

detail of diesel consumption is as mentioned in Table .

Table 6: Detail of fuel consumption

EPS Fuel used QuantityM 1 Diesel 4 liter/hour M 1 A1 Diesel 4 liter/hour

Diesel shall be procured from local vendors as per the requirement.

2.3 Process Description Surface facility has been designed considering potential of well for the handling of

produced Fluid/hydrocarbons (Oil, Gas & water) from the Oil well. Surface production

facility mainly comprises of production, separation, storage, heating, crude loading

including fire fighting pump, fire hydrants and other safety provisions as per statutory

guidelines.

Reservoir pressure at both the site is sufficient for the production of crude oil and

natural gas. Initially oil shall be produced due to the naturally occurring pressure i.e.

self flow at site. After depletion of reservoir pressure, artificial lift will be installed to

lift the fluid from well bore up to surface.


DEMO



Process of Storage/handling of Hydrocarbon: Produced hydrocarbons from wells

flows through 4” over ground pipe line up to EPS main header.

Firstly in to the well manifold then the Fluid (Oil + gas) flows into the separators for

separation of Oil & Gas.

a. Handling of Crude oil: Separated oil flows into the over head storage tanks for

measurement & storage. Oil will be loaded in Oil tankers vide loading platform and

transported to ONGC-CTF Tank.

b. Handling of produced associated gas: Gas is piped to the Gas flow line after

measurement through gas meter. The gas will be fed to bath heater and the

remaining gas will go to flare stack for flaring. In order to operate the wells for the

production of oil and gas, EPS was established.

Once the Crude Oil and associated gas are extracted from ground either due to self

pressure or with the help of pump jack, they will be diverted to two phase separator

wherein due to their density difference the same shall be separated.

Crude Oil shall be transferred to the temporary storage tanks and later transported to

ONGC for further processing. Two storage tanks shall be provided for temporary

storage of oil at site. Each tank shall have storage capacity of 45 m3. Oil shall be

maintained in liquid form by providing heat through bath heaters.

Associated gas will be used in bath heaters. Technical flaring of gas shall be

envisaged. The height of stack shall be 9 m from ground level as per OMR 1984

guideline.


DEMO



3 Study Area & Classification System

3.2 Study Area

The study area is within 10 km radius of project site at Ambliyara village, Dholka

taluka of Ahmedabad District. Area covers total around 48 villages of Dholka, Bavla

and Daskroi taluka of Ahmedabad district and Kheda taluka of Kheda district as

shown in the Map 1. Figure also depicts the major road and railways and canals

passing through the study area. The boundary of the village locations has been

derived from the Census of India maps.

3.3 Classification of Land use and Land cover

The classification system followed for land use/cover classification was same as

published by National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA), Government of India, in the

year 1988-89. This is two level of classification system with seven classes in first

levels. This system of classification requires some modification and made to include

additional sub-categories which are more relevant in describing the land use/cover

for a particular study area. A synopsis of the classification is summarized and

presented in Table 7.

Table 7: Synopsis of Land use/cover Classification System

S. No. First Level Classification Second Level Classification

1. Built-up Land or Habitation Residential / Commercial Industrial

2. Agricultural Land Crop Land Fallow Land Plantations

3. Forests

Evergreen / Semi-Evergreen Forests Deciduous Forests Close Forests Open Forests Degraded Forest or Scrub Forest Blank Forest Plantations Mangroves

4. Wastelands Salt-Affected Land Waterlogged Land Marshy / Swampy Land / Mud Land Area


DEMO



S. No. First Level Classification Second Level Classification Gullied / Ravenous Land Land without Scrub Sandy Area (Coastal and Desertic) Barren Rocky / Stony Waste / Sheet Rock Area

5. Water Bodies Reservoir / Lakes / Ponds / Tanks

River Beds

6. Others Shifting Cultivation Grassland / Grazing Land Snow Covered / Glacial Area

7. Vegetation Cover

Scrub Open vegetation Close vegetation Mangroves


DEMO



4 Methodology & Ground Survey

4.2 Methodology

DeTox Corporation Pvt. Ltd., Surat had entrusted the work to carry out - Satellite

Data Analysis and Interpretation for within 10 Km Area for Oil & Gas Exploration

project by GSPC at Ambliyara, Dholka taluka of Ahmedabad District, Gujarat. To

achieve above objective following methodology was employed for preparation of land

use/cover report.

• Study and collection of relevant documents and maps

• Interpretation of satellite data

• Field Survey / Ground Truthing

• Generation of final land use land cover map

• Impact assessment and mitigation measure suggestions

4.2.1 Study and collection of relevant documents and maps

4.2.1.1 Primary Data Collection The land use/land cover mapping was carried out using digital satellite imagery

procured from NRSA, Hyderabad. Details of the satellite data are as given in table 8

as under:

Table 8: Details of Satellite Data

Satellite Sensor Bands Year

Resourcesat 2 LISS IV 2,3,4 January, 2012

4.2.1.2 Secondary Data Collection

The ancillary data collected for the study were District planning series maps and

Census maps as base information for interpretation.

4.2.2 Interpretation of satellite data The study area was demarcated within the 10 km radius of the project site using

buffer option on the ancillary map collected. Satellite data was importing using

importing of data option and clubbing the three layers into the single layer for


DEMO



interpretation. The data was in standard projection system universally followed as

UTM.

Considering the basic elements of interpretation such as tone, size, shape, texture,

pattern, location, association, shadow, aspect and resolution along with ground truth

and ancillary information collected during the preliminary reconnaissance survey the

interpretation was accomplished. The classification scheme followed in the project

was according to NRSA classification system as mentioned in previous chapter.

4.2.3 Ground truth study Ground truth study comprises of data collection of ground features along with the

respective geographical position in terms of latitudes and longitudes with GPS. Using

all the collected information the data was interpreted. A detailed ground truth was

carried out to check the discrepancy of the interpreted data. This comprises of

respective geographical positions in terms of latitudes and longitude of ground

features.

4.2.4 Final Map preparation The proportional presence of different land uses and land cover in terms of statistical

percentages was derived for the study area. Appropriate legends were used to

represent the various categories of land use and land cover, and were then written

on the prepared land use and land cover maps.

4.3 Ground Survey

The field survey was carried out around radial distance of 10 km from the project

site; the site was visited on 19th August, 2013 for quality check of the map.

GPS readings were taken during the surveys wherever it was felt that additional

confirmation in interpretation of the data and also observations of land features were

noted. Additionally, spot checks were also done to confirm the land use / land cover

interpretation even where confidence of interpretation was high. Table 9 enumerates

the land features and its corresponding GPS readings of all the ground truthing

locations selected.


DEMO



Table 9: GPS Readings within Study Area

Sr. No. Latitude Longitude Village Site

1. 220 42’ 01.3” 720 35’ 04.0” Radhu Village

2. 220 42’ 42.4” 720 34’ 35.9” Radhu Agricultural land

3. 220 43’ 20.8” 720 34’ 43.7” Purshotampura -para Habitation

4. 220 43’ 59.9” 720 34’ 37.6” Near

Purshotampura - para

Agricultural land

5. 220 44’ 14.7” 720 34’ 37.7” Indiranagari para Habitation

6. 220 44’ 47.7” 720 34’ 28.3” Naika Village

7. 220 45’ 46.0” 720 34’ 26.6” Naika ONGC colony habitation

8. 220 46’ 16.2” 720 34’ 24.0” Nr Chalindra on Agricultural field

9. 220 46’ 24.0” 720 34’ 23.2” Chalindra Canal

10. 220 46’ 33.7” 720 34’ 33.9” Chalindra Waterbody

11. 220 47’ 54.4” 720 34’ 39.5” Navagam Habitation

12. 220 48’ 51.4” 720 34’ 51.3” Near Navagam Industrial Area

13. 220 49’ 23.6” 720 34’ 55.1” Near Navagam Industrial Area

14. 220 49’ 35.6” 720 32’ 35.6” Mahijda Waterbody

15. 220 49’ 34.8” 720 31’ 50.7” Mahijda - Timba Industrial Area

16. 220 49’ 33.3” 720 30’ 17.1” Near Saroda Sabarmati River

17. 220 49’ 12.3” 720 28’ 51.8” Near Saroda Canal

18. 220 48’ 58.2” 720 28’ 21.6” Near Saroda Rai University

19. 220 48’ 46.5” 720 27’ 56.0” Near Chaloda Vegetation Cover

20. 220 48’ 21.2” 720 26’ 54.7” Chaloda Waterbody

21. 220 47’ 27.9” 720 27’ 17.8” Vasna Keliya Plantation

22. 220 47’ 42.1” 720 28’ 42.4” Chandisar Eucalyptus Plantation

23. 220 47’ 47.6” 720 29’ 15.3” Chandisar Village

24. 220 46’ 42.7” 720 28’ 59.7” Durgipura Village


DEMO



Sr. No. Latitude Longitude Village Site

25. 220 46’ 25.3” 720 29’ 02.9” Durgipura Plantation

26. 220 45’ 40.2” 720 30’ 36.6” Amaliyara Village

27. 220 45’ 50.3” 720 30’ 22.8” Amaliyara Waterbody

28. 220 46’ 01.6” 720 29’ 54.4” Amaliyara Aquatic vegetation

29. 220 44’ 26.3” 720 27’ 20.6” Dholka City

30. 220 42’ 52.1” 720 28’ 19.6” Dholka GIDC Area

31. 220 42’ 03.1” 720 31’ 37.4” Rasikpura Bricks kiln

32. 220 42’ 14.3” 720 31’ 27.1” Rasikpura Village

33. 220 42’ 04.2” 720 32’ 18.1” Near Rasikpura Industrial Area

34. 220 42’ 05.0” 720 32’ 36.6” Near Rasikpura Plantation

35. 220 42’ 06.7” 720 33’ 28.3” Near Rasikpura Plantation

36. 220 42’ 07.6” 720 33’ 58.4” Near Radhu Open Vegetation


DEMO



5 Land Use/Cover Pattern of the Study Area The land use and land cover in the region comprises of thirteen categories viz.

Agriculture, Scrub, Open Vegetation, Close Vegetation, Habitation, Industrial Area,

Water body, River, Salt affected Land, Barren land, Sandy Area, Aquatic Vegetation

and Plantation. The image was classified into the above mentioned thirteen classes

for different regions of interest are given in Map 2. The photo documentation is as

given in Annexure1. Brief description of each type of the class forming land use and

land cover, derived from the remote sensing data analysis and the ground

observations are explained below.

5.2 Agriculture

The most observed category in the area was agriculture covering 78 per cent of the

study area. The major crop cultivated in the study area was mostly Paddy (Oryza

sativa) in rainy season, Wheat (Triticum aestivum) and fodder crop in winter season.

In central region mostly vegetables were grown and during summers as per the

availability of water crops were grown. Water for agriculture is essentially from canal

and bore well which goes upto 100fts in low line areas and in other areas 300-400fts.

5.3 Scrub

There are areas having sparse vegetation it is mainly covered by grasses these

areas are delineated as Scrub. As per the classification based on Forest Survey of

India the category denotes land having bushes and poor tree growth with canopy

density less than 10 percent. The Scrub category was mostly present near the

habitation.

5.4 Open Vegetation

The vegetation category Open was segregated based on the canopy density of 10 to

20 per cent. Open Vegetation was mostly of mixed type which includes Prosopis

juliflora, Acacia nilotica, Azadirachta indica etc.

5.5 Close Vegetation

The vegetation category Close was segregated based on the canopy density of

greater than 20 per cent. Close Vegetation was just 0.07 per cent of the study area.


DEMO



5.6 Habitation

Habitation category covers 3.37 per cent of the study area it includes Dholka taluka

headquaters.

5.7 Industrial Area

The Industrial Area delineated was of mixed type having polymers, iron, chemicals,

drugs and ceramics near Dholka. Mostly the bricks kiln were present in the study

area.

5.8 Water body

There were small scattered water bodies in the study area and biggest was at

Chalindra village.

5.9 River

Only river Sabarmati flows through the study area.

5.10 Salt affected Land

The land having no vegetation cover and giving pure white reflectance in the satellite

data was delineated as salt affected land. The salt affected land was just 0.05 per

cent of land.

5.11 Barren Land

The land having no vegetation cover giving blue reflectance in the satellite data was

delineated as Barren land. The barren land is present scattered within the study

area.

5.12 Sandy Area

Along the Sabarmati river 1.37 per cent of the area is covered by sandy region.

5.13 Aquatic Vegetation

The aquatic vegetation growing within the water body showed specific dirty red

reflectance. Aquatic vegetation growth is seen in some village ponds.


DEMO



5.14 Plantation

The plantation category was delineated based on pattern and dark red tone seen in

the data. This may be of horticultural trees like Guava, Custard apple, and in some

area Mango, Lemon and Chikoo. Also the timber trees like Eucalyptus sp. were also

grown.

5.15 Area Statistics of Land Use/ Cover Classes

The area statistics of these classes are presented in Table 10. The major portion of

the study region is covered by Agriculture followed by Open Vegetation and Scrub.

Table 10: Land use/cover Classes Area Statistics within 10 km Radius of

Project Site

Sr. No. Class Area (Ha.) Area (sq. km.) Area (%)

1. Agriculture 24672.18 246.72 78.57

2. Scrub 1415.91 14.16 4.51

3. Open Vegetation 1871.34 18.71 5.96

4. Close Vegetation 22.00 0.22 0.07

5. Habitation 1058.59 10.59 3.37

6. Industrial Area 620.00 6.20 1.97

7. Water Body 342.38 3.42 1.09

8. River 431.00 4.30 1.37

9. Salt Affected Land 15.29 0.15 0.05

10. Barren Land 87.67 0.88 0.28

11. Sandy Area 237.50 2.37 0.76

12. Aquatic Vegetation 65.05 0.65 0.21

13. Plantation 561.88 5.62 1.79


DEMO



ANNEXURE 1

PHOTO DOCUMENTATION

Photo 1: Paddy Crop Photo 2: Custard Apple Plantation

Photo 3: Aquatic Vegetation – Ambliyara village

Photo 4: Guava Plantation

Photo 5: Dholka GIDC Photo 6: Citrus plantation at Chitral

Village

Photo 7: Canal Photo 8: Sabarmati River


DEMO

Annexure 7

Socioeconomic study report


DEMO

SOCIO ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT PLAN

INTRODUCTION

The socio economic development aspects are detailed out in socio economic

environment. Technical impacts of the proposed project are also well analyzed in an

appropriate place of the projects. Though there are no irreparable damaging impacts of

project. The present study aims at the focusing the development opportunities emerging

out of the new investment which would lead to direct and indirect benefits. In view of the

potential benefits of such kind the present exercise of systematic development plan is

undertaken with back drop of essential human development and welfare in the area of

education and health care of the project area.

However the full scale implementation will depend upon the all the stake holders and

potentials of development including project expanding company and villages of the

project areas.

The Socio economic features of the project have been presented under two broad heads

of secondary data. The primary data has been collected from the field visits. The

immediate impact zone of the project site has been covered through the primary

surveys. The immediate impact zone has been defined within a radial distance of 5 km.

the source of information collected has been made by contacts with the villagers,

sarpanch, talati, school teachers and prominent people in the villages.

The detailed data has been processed in specific tabulation with due care of its

verification. In order to retained the flow of analysis and linkages with different

components of the social and economic structure and environment. We have classified

the details of primary data in the following sub heads and wherever, required secondary

data collected from authentic sources have also been used with appropriate mention of

their sources.

With an aim to highlighting the strength and weakness of the villages likely to be

impacted by pant, we have done adequate analysis and synthesis to clearly bring out the

relevant observations appropriate socio economic development plan could be drawn.

PROJECT AND PROJECT AREA

Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Ltd. (GSPC) has already its plant in this area. This

corporate social responsibility company brings out the expansion of the project worth Rs.

Approximately 1 crores in the development of production facilities at each sides which

will generate considerable direct and indirect benefits for the project area such as direct

employment of skilled and unskilled labour and new infrastructural facilities.

The proposed project falls in “industrial area” far away from forest etc. the main location

is at Ambaliyara village of Dholka Taluka of Ahmedabad district.

The villages within the radius of 10 Km radius are as mentioned below.


DEMO

List of villages

Sr.

no. Village name

1. Ambliyara/Dariyapura

2. Chitrasar

3. Sathal

4. Kaloli

5. Rajpur

6. Jalapur Verifa

7. Chandisar

8. Dharoda

SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT OF THE PROJECT AREA VILLAGES

Socio economic data are drawn from the primary sources like census and district

statistical hand book etc. We defined the frame work of socio economic environment in

terms of the following components

1. Demographic characteristics which defines the human development level of the

village community

2. Economic characteristics which provides indicator of the economic development

level

3. Social data matrix which provide the social composition of the community which

would reflect the socio cultural dimensions

A detailed analysis will not only highlight the relevant issues but also would provide

guiding path of the development of the project area villages.

DEMOGRAPHIC CHARACTERS

Demographic data of the project area provides human development indicators. Very

selected data of the total project area i. e all the villages are briefly summarized in the

following figures, while village wise details are shown in the table 1 and table 2


DEMO

Secondary data demographic structure of the project area is collected from census book

2001 is as mentioned below:

Table 1: Demographic structure of the project area

Total population 23686

Total house hold 4702

Total male population 12478

Total female population 11208


DEMO

Sex ratio 1.11%

Literate population 13423

Female literacy 4942

Female literacy ratio 36.82%

Tribal population 4177

Tribal population ratio 17.63%

Non tribal population 19509

Total working population 11232

Total non working population 10782

INFRASTRUCTURAL SUPPORT FACILITIES IN THE PROJECT AREA

Infrastructural facilities and resources exhibit the essential support for the realization of

potential and rapid economic development of villages. Some of the selected indicators of

the infrastructural facilities are under mentioned in the table for the project area

Secondary data for infrastructural support of the project area is collected during the site

visit is mentioned as below table

Table 2: Infrastructural indicators of project area

Sr.

no

Indicator (1) (2) (3) (4)

a) Educational facility Primary

school

Secondary

school

College/

higher

education

--

√ √ √ --

b) Medical facility Primary

health

centre

Private clinics Hospitals Specialist

hospital

√ √ √ √

c) Transport Pakka roads Approach

Road

Connection

Road With

Highway

Bus and

Railway

√ √ √ √

d) Communication Post office Telephone

STDs

Private

telephone

Mobile

√ √ √ √

e) Power supply

√ √ √ √


DEMO

f) Drinking water

supply

Hand Pump Open Well Tap Water ---

√ √ √ ---

Note: (√) indicates that this facility is available to villages

ECONOMIC STRUCTURE AND THEIR IMPLICATIONS

Economic structure of village economy is generally characterized by the economic

activity levels of poverty and unemployment and agricultural sector and non agricultural

sector and position and economic class etc. Readily available economic data are

exhibited for the project area while village wise data are shown in the Table 2.


DEMO

Table 2: ECONOMIC STRUCTURE OF VILLAGE ECONOMY

Indicator

Total workers 11232

Main workers 8690

Non workers 10782

Agricultural workers 5416 (Main+Marginal)

Total cultivators 2339

Marginal cultivators 77

Non agricultural activities 2933

Economic status

• Poverty

• 35%

SOCIAL STRUCTURE

Social structure determines the benefits of development among the villages society of

our kind. As our village society is not highly socially backward and gives free social

mobility of the village people.


DEMO

Overall social structure of the project area is demonstrated by “Non Tribal population” in

the area as percentage tribal population is very less. As seen at Dholka taluka with 17 %

of tribal population has poverty ratio 35%.

The cultural belief and customs and drinking etc are well accepted constraints of the

tribal development applicable to the extent of tribal population. However there are

definite benefits of class homogeneity available in these areas.

SOCIO ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT PLAN

CONTEXT

Socio economic and demographic characters of the project area provide the potential

and problems of the social economic development of project areas. The expansion plant

project company GSPC Private Limited statement of donation provided for various

activities. APPROACH

Our plan approach will be based on the participation of company. Village people and

district development authority (DRDA/ DDO) and line like bank and department of

agriculture, tribal project office etc

METHODOLOGY

The cluster of development of villages will be developed and five years development plan

including annual plan will be prepared through Gram panchayat under the guidance of

ten experts. These plans will be approved by Gram sabha and District Panchayat.

IV OPERATIONAL MECHANISM OF PLAN

We shall have a planning and development committee consisting of the representatives

of company, Village panchayat, state development bodies and expert nominated.

A function of systemic plan, implementation and monitoring and evaluation of the

development plan will be take care by this committee. The quarterly meeting of this

body will be mandatory.

CONCLUDING NOTE:

It is expected that appropriate plan of development will take place and wherever

possible state resources of development also utilizes with new procedures.


DEMO

Table: 1: Demographic Characters

NAME No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_06 P_SC P_ST P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT P_ILL M_ILL F_ILL

Chandisar 847 4039 2123 1916 562 619 4 2099 1304 795 1940 819 1121

Jalalpur/

Vazifa 736 3839 2015 1824 571 666 27 2196 1384 812 1643 631 1012

Rajpur 204 951 505 446 125 272 0 594 377 217 357 128 229

Ambliyara/

Dariyapura 696 3550 1868 1682 470 794 8 2283 1419 864 1267 449 818

Sathal 785 3940 2081 1859 562 640 21 2227 1397 830 1713 684 1029

Dharoda 478 2570 1345 1225 404 443 7 1370 870 500 1200 475 725

Chitrasar 324 1584 829 755 238 345 43 929 588 341 655 241 414

Kalolis 632 3213 1712 1501 535 284 4 1725 1142 583 1488 570 918

Total 4702 23686 12478 11208 3467 4063 114 13423 8481 4942 10263 3997 6266

Table 2: Demographic Characters

NAME

TOT_

WOR

K_P

MAIN

WOR

K_P

MAIN_

CL_P

MAIN_

AL_P

MAIN_

HH_P

MAI

N_O

T_P

MARG

WORK

_P

MAR

G_CL

_P

MAR

G_A

L_P

MAR

G_H

H_P

MAR

G_O

T_P

NONWO

RK_P

Chandisar 1620 1495 311 913 51 220 125 6 112 2 5 2419

Jalalpur Vazifa 2003 1457 380 582 24 471 546 31 439 3 73 1836

Rajpur 556 551 72 371 2 106 5 0 5 0 0 395

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Ambaliyara/Da

riyapura 1553 1356 376 655 15 310 197 16 160 7 14 1997

Sathal 2208 1260 338 484 15 423 948 5 423 79 441 1732

Dharoda 1265 995 268 370 5 227 270 5 185 1 79 728

Chitrasar 584 483 188 140 14 119 101 9 54 0 38 673

Kaloli 1443 1093 329 309 14 281 350 5 214 5 126 1002

Total 11232 8690 2262 3824 140 2157 2542 77

159

2 97 776 10782

Abbreviations used for table no. 3 and 4

No_HH: Number of house hold

TOT_P: Total Population

TOT_M: Total Male

TOT_F: Total Female

P_06: 0‐6 year population

P_SC: SC population

P_ST: ST population

M_LIT: Male literates

F_LIT: Female literates

M_ILL: Male illiterates

F_ILL: Female illiterates

TOT_WORK_P: Total working population

Total CL: Total (Main + Marginal) cultivators

Total AL: Total (Main + Marginal) agriculture

Total HH: Total (Main + Marginal) household

Total OT: Total (Main + Marginal) other workers

NON_WORK_P: Non working population

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Annexure 8

Risk assessment and disaster management plan


DEMO

Risk Assessment 1 RISK ASSESSMENT

Risk assessment is a careful examination of consequences resulting from the undesired

events that could cause harm to people or property, so that sufficient precautions can be

taken. Workers and others have a right to be protected from harm caused by a failure to

take reasonable control measures.

Hydrocarbon operations are generally hazardous in nature by virtue of intrinsic chemical

properties of hydrocarbons or their temperature or pressure of operation or a combination

of these. Fire, explosion, hazardous release or a combination of these are the hazards

associated with hydrocarbon operations. These have resulted in the development of more

comprehensive, systematic and sophisticated methods of Safety Engineering, such as,

Hazard Analysis and Risk Assessment to improve upon the integrity, reliability and safety of

hydrocarbon operations.

1.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE RISK ASSESSMENT

As per the requirements stated in the Terms of Reference of the EIA study, the risk

assessment study has been undertaken to address the following aspects:

• To identify and assess those fire and explosion hazards arising from production of oil

and gas in order to comply with regulatory requirements, company policy and

business requirements

• To eliminate or reduce to as low as reasonably practical (ALARP) in terms of risk to

human health, risk of injury, risk of damage to plant, equipment and environment,

business interruption or loss etc.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS IN PRODUCTION OF OIL & GAS FROM

FACILITY (M1 & M1A1)

Various hazards associated with production of oil and gas is briefly described as below.

1.2.1 Minor crude Oil Spill

A minor oil spill is confined within the well site area. The conditions which can result in

minor oil spill are as follows:

Spillage in Crude oil Storage System:

Crude Oil spillage from leaking valves, lines and storage tank

Spillage while crude oil production:


DEMO

During the well production operation, there exists a possibility of hydrocarbon gases being

released and spillage of crude oil may result from a failure of pipe, lines valves, separator at

production facility. Spilled oil should be immediately cleaned once the leakage is controlled.

1.2.2 Major Oil Spill

Significant hydrocarbon inventories will be spilled in case of major leakages in storage

tanks, separator or as a result of an uncontrolled flow from a well during production and / or

resulting from a failure of the surface equipment. Since the reservoir does not have the

pressure which will allow the well as self flowed well, artificial lift method (sucker Rod

Pump) is proposed to bring the oil on the surface and have commercial production.

Therefore possibility of uncontrolled flow from well during production is remote.

For this to occur would require a combination of mechanical damage, such as, ruptured flow

line coupled with failure of the emergency shutdown (ESD) system. Oil is produced with

some associated gas, therefore, an oil spill arising from a failure of larger inventory tanks

will result in the release to atmosphere of hydrocarbon vapors together with oil droplets in

the form of a mist.

Another major source of oil spill is road tankers. It is proposed that produced crude oil will

be transported by road tanker of 20 KL. In case of failure / overturning / accident of road

tanker possibility of major oil spill cannot be ruled out.

1.2.3 Blowout

As the well self pressure is very low and with the availability of Christmas tree, possibility of

blowout is ruled out.

1.2.4 Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S)

Since the available data does not show any content of the H2S, hence the release of H2S

during production is not envisaged.

1.3 CONTROL MEASURES FOR ABOVE HAZARDS

1.3.1 Control measures for major spills of crude oil from storage tanks, separators

and pipe lines

1) Inspection of tanks / separator during fabrication shall be carried out as per the

requirements of the applicable codes, specifications, drawings etc. This inspection

requires regular checks on the work at various stages as it progresses. During

fabrication, a thorough visual check should be undertaken and the tank should be


DEMO

checked for foundation pad and slope, slope of the bottom plates, proper welding

sequence and external & internal surfaces etc.

2) Roof plates shall be inspected for defects like pin holes, weld cracks, pitting etc., at

water accumulation locations.

3) Tanks pads shall be visually checked for settlement, sinking, tilting, cracking and

general deterioration.

4) Anchor bolts wherever provided shall be checked for tightness, and integrity by

hammer testing.

5) All open vents, flame arrestors and breather valves shall be examined to ensure that

the wire mesh and screens are neither torn nor clogged by foreign matter or insects.

6) If a tank is insulated, the insulation and weather proof sealing shall be visually

inspected for damages.

7) Grounding connections shall be visually checked for corrosion at the points where they

enter earth and at the connection to the tank.

8) The tanks shall be inspected for any obvious leakage of the product. Valves and

fittings shall be checked for tightness and free operations.

9) The tanks shell shall be visually examined for external corrosion, seepage, cracks,

bulging and deviation from the vertical.

10) NDT test for pipeline

11) Hydrostatic testing of tanks shall be carried out.

12) Facility certification from relevant competent authority under petroleum rules to be

obtained before starting the operation.

13) OISD standard 244 once implemented should be followed.

1.3.2 Control measures for oil spill from road tankers

1) Proper route of road tankers should be decided in the premises for entry and exit of road

tankers. Security persons should guide the tanker drivers to follow the route

accordingly.

2) Speed of road tankers in the premises should be strictly restricted.


DEMO

3) All road tankers / vehicle entering in the production / storage area should be provided

with spark arrester at their silencers to avoid spark into open atmosphere in case of

leakage / spillage of oil.

4) During loading / unloading – double earthing should be practiced.

5) Proper SOP should be prepared and implemented for connection of road tanker, filling

and disconnection.

6) All road tankers utilized should be tested and certified by competent person under

petroleum rules.

7) Drivers should be well trained and experience in driving of vehicles carrying Hazardous

substances.

1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS BY FIRE AND EXPLOSION INDEX & TOXICITY

INDEX

Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) is an important technique employed for hazards

identification process. Consequence analysis then quantifies the vulnerable zone for a

conceived incident. Once vulnerable zone is identified for an incident, measures can be

formulated to eliminate or reduce damage to plant and potential injury to personnel.

Rapid ranking of hazard of an entire installation, if it is small, or a portion of it, if it is large,

is often done to obtain a quick assessment of degree of the risk involved. The Dow Fire and

Explosion Index (F&EI) and Toxicity Index (TI) are the most popular methods for Rapid

Hazard Ranking. These are based on a formal systematized approach, mostly independent

of judgmental factors, for determining the relative magnitude of the hazards in an

installation using hazardous (inflammable, explosive and toxic) materials.

The steps involved in the determination of the F & EI and TI are:

Selection of a pertinent process unit

Determination of the Material Factor (MF)

Determination of the Toxicity Factor (Th)

Determination of the Supplement to Maximum Allowable Concentration

(Ts)

Determination of the General Process Hazard Factor (GPH)

Determination of the Special Process Hazard Factor (SPH)


DEMO

Determination of the F&EI value

Determination of the TI value

Determination of the Exposure Area

1.4.1 Hazardous Material Identification Methodology

From the preliminary appraisal of Material Safety Data Sheet, it is observed that high speed

diesel, natural gas and crude oil are hazardous. F&EI and TI values have been computed for

three phase separator of crude oil and natural gas as well as Crude oil storage tank.

In general, the higher is the value of material factor (MF), the more inflammable and

explosive is the material. Similarly, higher values of toxicity factor (Th) and supplement to

maximum allowable concentration (Ts) indicate higher toxicity of the material. The

tabulated values of MF, Th and Ts are given in Dows Fire and Explosion Index Hazard

Classification Guide. For compounds not listed in Dow reference, MF can be computed from

the knowledge of flammability and reactivity classification, Th can be computed from the

knowledge of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Index and Ts can be obtained

from the knowledge of maximum allowable concentration (MAC) values. The MF, Th and Ts

values are respectively 16, 0 and 50 for crude oil, 21, 0 and 50 for natural gas, and 10, 0

and 50 for HSD.

General process hazards (GPH) are computed by adding the penalties applied for the

various process factor.

Special process hazards (SPH) are computed by adding the penalties applied for the process

and natural factors.

Both General process hazards and Special process hazards corresponding to various process

and natural factors are used with MF to compute F&EI value and with Th and Ts to compute

TI value.

1.4.2 F&EI Computation

F&EI value computed for TPS and CTT from GPH and SPH values using the following formula

F&EI = MF x [1 + GPH (total)] x [1 + SPH (total)]

1.4.3 Toxicity Index (TI)

Toxicity index (TI) is computed from toxicity factor (Th) and supplement to maximum

allowable concentrations (Ts) using the following relationship:

TI = (Th + Ts) x [1 + GPH (total) + SPH (total)]/100


DEMO

Calculation for F&EI as well as TI is given in table shown below for Natural gas and crude

oil.

Table 1: Fire and Explosion Index for Natural Gas / crude oil

Material Factor 21 / 16 Nf=4, Nr=0

1 GPH

Penalty

factor

range

Penalty

factor

used Remark

Base factor 1.00 1.00 Base factor

A Exothermic reaction 0.3-1.25 0.00 No reaction

B Endothermic process 0.2-0.4 0.00 NA

C Material handling and transfer 0.2-1.05 0.5

For class I flammable

material transfer through

pipeline

D Enclosed or Indoor process unit 0.25-0.9 0.00 Not Enclosed

E Access 0.2-0.35 0.00

Two side easy access so

NA

F Drainage & spill control 0.25-0.5 0.00 Proper dike design so NA

General process Hazard factor

F1 1.5

2 SPH

Penalty

factor

range

Penalty

factor

used

Base factor 1.00 1.00

A Toxic material 0.2-0.8 0.20 Nh=1

B

Sub atmospheric pressure(<500

mm hg) 0.5 0.00 NA

C

Operation in or near flammable

range

1 Tank farm storage flammable liquid 0.5


DEMO

2 Process upset or purge failure 0.3

3 Always in flammable range 0.8 0.8

D Dust Explosion 0.25-2.0 0 NA

E Pressure 0.86-1.5 0 Above normal pressure

F Low temperature 0.2-0.3 0 NA

G

Quantity of flammable / unstable

material

1 Liquid or gases in process 0.2-3 0.2

2 Liquid or gases in storage 0.1-1.6

3

Combustible solid in storage, dust

in process 0.2-4

H Corrosion & Erosion 0.1-0.75 0.1 <0.005 in per year

I Leakage joint and packing 0.1-1.5 0.1

possibility of minor

leakage

J Use of fired equipment 0.1-1 0 NA

K Hot oil heat exchange system

0.15-

1.15 0 NA

L Rotating equipment 0.5 0 NA

Special process Hazard F2 2.4

Process unit hazard

factor(F1×F2)=F3 3.6

Fire and Explosion

Index(F3×MF) 75.6

TOXICITY INDEX

Toxicity number Th 50 Nh=1

Penalty factor Ts 50 TLV 0.5 ppm

Toxicity Index 4.9


DEMO

Table 2: Conclusion for Fire, Explosion & toxicity Index

Applicable Fire and Explosion index range

1-60 Light

61-96 Moderate

97-127 Intermediate

128-158 Heavy

>159 Severe

CONCLUSION FOR TOXICITY INDEX

Applicable Toxicity index range

1-5 Light

6-9 Moderate

above 10 High

1.4.4 Hazards description

Substance F&EI value TI value F&EI range TI range

Natural gas /

Crude oil

75.6 4.9 Moderate Light

From the above various hazards identified from the proposed project activities are as under:

• Fire and explosion hazard due to natural gas / crude oil.

Other hazards are:

• Occupational health hazards

• Other hazards

Consequences of hazards also depend on prevailing meteorological conditions and

population density in surrounding areas.

1.5 CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS

Oil and gas may be released as a result of jet fire, pool fire & less likely unconfined vapor

cloud explosion causing possible damage to the surrounding areas. The extent of the

damage depends upon the nature of the release. The release of flammable material and

subsequent ignition results in heat radiation, pressure wave or vapor cloud depending upon


DEMO

the flammability and its physical state. It is important to visualize the consequence of the

release of such substances and the damage caused to the surrounding areas.

An insight into physical effects resulting from the release of hazardous substances can be

had by means of various models. Vulnerability models can also be used to translate the

physical effects occurring in terms of injuries and damage to exposed population and

buildings.

Consequence analysis quantifies vulnerable zone for a conceived incident and once the

vulnerable zone is identified for an incident, measures can be proposed to eliminate damage

to plant and potential injury to personnel. The following likely maximum credible scenarios

(Primary) considered for hazard analysis

• Catastrophic failure of crude oil storage tank

• Catastrophic failure / leakage of separator lead to free spread pool fire.

• Full bore failure of pipe from well to separator lead to pool / jet fire.

• Entire inventory leaked out from road tanker / leakage in road tanker lead to free

spread pool fire.

Table 3: Damage Caused at Various Heat Loads

Heat Load (kW/m2)

Denoted by Type of Damage

37.5 Sufficient to cause damage to process equipment. 100% fatal in 1 min. 1% fatal in 10 sec.

25.0 Minimum energy required to ignite wood infinitely long exposure (non-piloted). 100% fatal in 1 min. Significant injury in 10 seconds.

12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic tubing. 1% fatal in 1 minute. First degree burn in 10 seconds.

4.0 Pain after 20 second. Blistering unlikely.

1.6 No discomfort even long exposure.

Data considered for release:

1. For storage tanks scenarios storage full volume considered @ 45 KL of crude oil.

Tank is considered in side dyke. Tank diameter is 2.8 meter with height of 7.5 meter.

2. At the time of release 75% full inventory stored inside the tank.


DEMO

3. For separator, diameter is considered 0.92 meter and height 3.26 meter is

considered.

4. As per lay out pipe connected from well to separator is 100 mm sch 40.

5. Tanker is considered of 20 KL and for developing scenarios 80% of tanker is filled

with crude oil and position of tanker is considered near storage area at loading

station.

Damage area from the above scenarios is presented in the model developed with HAMS-GPS

software and tabulated below. It was observed that results for damage distances almost

remain same for stability class D & F and hence result for stability class D was tabulated

below

Table 4: Damage distance with heat loss

Scenario Damage distances

plotted on plant lay

out and show in

figure number

below

Distance in meter from source

1.6

KW/m2

4

KW/m2

12.5

KW/m2

25

KW/m2

37.5

KW/m2

Crude oil storage tank

pool dyke fire

Error! Reference

source not found.

for EPS#M1 and

Figure 2 for

EPS#M1A1

25.28 17.33 11.24 9.05 8.43

Separator 10% leakage

without dyke

Figure 3 for

EPS#M1 and Figure

4 for EPS#M1A1

32.64 21.23 13.79 11.17 10.21

Separator pool fire

without dyke

Figure 5 for

EPS#M1 and Figure

6 for EPS#M1A1

94.33 61.47 38.17 30.40 27.11

Full bore failure of pipe

from well to separator

lead to pool fire

Figure 7 for

EPS#M1 and Figure

8 for EPS#M1A1

25.21 16.70 10.65 8.84 8.22


DEMO

Full bore failure of pipe

from well to separator

lead to jet fire

Figure 9 for

EPS#M1 and Figure

10 for EPS#M1A1

31.21 24.54 20.72 19.79 19.36

Road tanker all

inventory leakage free

spread pool fire

Figure 11 for EPS

M1 and Figure 12

for EPS#M1A1

197.13 128.03 78.25 60.87 53.93

10% Road tanker all

inventory leakage free

spread pool fire

Figure 13 for

EPS#M1 and Figure

14 for EPS#M1A1

72.89 47.55 29.85 23.81 21.31

All above damage distances were plotted on site layout of M1 and M1A1. Site lay out with

damage distances represented as figures below. Form the figures it can be observed that

damaging distances from all scenarios except Road Tanker Inventory leaked out ( i.e Figure

12 and Figure 14) will be restricted to the boundary of plant premise.

Whereas in some cases, the effect of damage will be minimal outside the plant premises as

shown in graphical representation in Error! Reference source not found., Figure 3,

Figure 7, Figure 9 for EPS#M1 and Figure 2, Figure 4, Figure 8, Figure 10 for EPS M1A1. The

effect of radiation outside premises will be 1.6 KW/m2 and in some case 4 KW/m2, which will

have negligible impact on human beings. Road tanker scenario has been considered at

loading station, near the entry / exit gate of the premises. Hence the damage crosses the

boundary of plant premises. However SOP during loading / unloading will be implemented to

avoid any such kind of incidences.


DEMO

Figure 1: Crude oil storage tank pool dyke fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 2: Crude oil storage tank pool dyke fire at M1A1


DEMO

Figure 3: 10 % Separator leakage and free spread fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 4: 10 % Separator leakage and free spread fire at M1A1


DEMO

Figure 5: Separator leakage and free spread fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 6: Separator leakage and free spread fire at M1A1


DEMO

Figure 7: Full bore failure of main pipe lead to pool fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 8: Full bore failure of main pipe lead to pool fire at M1A1


DEMO

Figure 9: Full bore failure of main pipe lead to jet fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 10: Full bore failure of main pipe lead to jet fire at M1A1


DEMO

Figure 11: Entire road tanker inventory leakage free spread fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 12: Entire road tanker inventory leakage free spread fire at M1A1


DEMO

Figure 13: 10% road tanker inventory leakage free spread fire at M1


DEMO

Figure 14: 10% road tanker inventory leakage free spread fire at M1A1

1.6 BASIC PREVENTIVE & PROTECTIVE FEATURES

• Adequate water supplies for fire protection. The amount/quantity of the water

requirement is based on rate of firewater required for the worst possible fire and the

time duration for which the fire will last

• Structural design of vessels, piping, structural steel, etc.

• Overpressure relief devices

• Corrosion resistance and/or allowances

• Segregation of reactive materials in pipelines and equipment

• Electrical equipment grounding

• Safe location of auxiliary electrical gear (transformers, breakers, etc.)


DEMO

• Normal protection against utility loss (alternate electrical feeder, spare instrument,

air compressor, etc.)

• Compliance with various applicable codes (ASME, ASTM, ANSI, Building Codes, Fire

Codes, etc.).

• Compliance of OISD-189 for firefighting equipment

• Fail-safe instrumentation

• Access to area for emergency vehicles and exits for personal evacuation

• Drainage to handle probable spills safely plus fire fighting water hose nozzle sprinkler

and/or chemicals

• Insulation of hot surfaces that heat to within 80% of the auto-ignition temperature of

any flammable material in the area

• Adherence to the National Electrical Code. The Code should be followed except where

variances have been requested /approved.

• Hazard area analysis followed by appropriate intrinsically safe electrical equipment

wherever required

• Limitation of glass devices and expansion joints in flammable or hazardous service.

Such devices are not permitted unless absolutely essential. Where used, they must

be registered and approved by the production manager and installed in accordance

with appropriate standards and specifications

• Protection of pipe racks and instrument cable trays as well as their supports from

exposure to fire

• Provision of accessible battery limit block valves

• Protection of fired equipment against accidental explosion and resultant fire

8.5 RISKS AND FAILURE PROBABILITY

The term Risk involves the quantitative evaluation of likelihood of any undesirable event as

well as likelihood of harm of damage being caused to life, property and environment. This

harm or damage may only occur due to sudden/ accidental release of any hazardous

material from the containment. This sudden/accidental release of hazardous material can

occur due to failure of component systems. It is difficult to ascertain the failure probability

of any system because it will depend on the components of the system. Even if failure

occurs, the probability of fire and the extent of damage will depend on many factors like:

Quantity and physical properties of material released.

Source of ignition.

Wind velocity and direction


DEMO

Presence of population, properties etc. nearby.

Frequencies of Loss of Containment (LOCs) for atmospheric tanks as per CPR 18E guidelines

are as under:

Basic failure frequencies for catastrophic failure of pressure tank / bullet as well as for full

bore failure of pipelines are considered from CPR 18E and they are as under.

Facility

Basic failure frequency

for Catastrophic failure

per year

Failure frequency after

application of correction

Pressure vessel 5.00E-07 5.50E-06

pipeline75 mm <= nominal

diameter <= 150 mm 3.00E-07 m-1 3.00E-06 m-1

1.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

During the project work lot of activities will be involved such as construction, erection,

testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance, where the men, materials and

machines are the basic inputs. Along with the boons, the industrialization generally brings

several problems like occupational health and safety.

The following occupational health and safety issues are specific to proposed plant activities

will arise during project work as well as regular operation of plant:

• Physical hazards

• Electrical hazards

• Noise

• Fire hazards

1.7.1 Physical Hazards

Industry specific physical hazards are discussed below.

Potential physical hazards in proposed plants are related to handling heavy mechanical

transport (e.g. trucks) and work at heights (e.g. platforms, ladders, and stairs).

Heavy Loads / Rolling during construction phase


DEMO

Lifting and moving heavy loads at elevated heights using hydraulic platforms and cranes

presents a significant occupational safety hazard. Recommended measures to prevent and

control potential worker injury include the following;

Clear signage in all transport corridors and working areas;

Appropriate design and layout of facilities to avoid crossover of different activities

and flow of processes;

Implementation of specific load handling and lifting procedures, including:

• Description of load to be lifted (dimensions, weight, position of center of gravity)

• Specifications of the lifting crane to be used (maximum lifted load, dimensions)

• Train the staff in handling of lifting equipments and driving mechanical

transport devices

The area of operation of fixed handling equipment (e.g. cranes, elevated platforms)

should not cross above worker and pre-assembly areas;

Material and product handling should remain within restricted zones under

supervision;

Regular maintenance and repair of lifting, electrical, and transport equipment should

be conducted.

Use appropriate PPE ( as per GSPC PPE Policy) Implement work rotations providing

regular work breaks, access to a cool rest area, and drinking water and under

hygienic facilities.

1.7.2 Electrical Hazards

Workers may be exposed to electrical hazards due to the presence of heavy-duty electrical

equipment in plant.

1.7.3 Noise

Noise level at operational site shall be upto moderate level. However, Proper environment

management plan has been formulated to control the same

1.7.4 Fire Hazards

Fire fighting system to control the hazard is discussed in previous sections

1.8 OTHER HAZARDS AND ITS CONTROLS

The other possible hazards at site are as given below:

Table 5: Other Hazards and Its Controls


DEMO

Name of

possible

hazard or

emergency

Its source &

reason

Its effects on

person, property &

environment

Place of effect Control measures

provided

Building

collapse

Earthquake

Any natural

Calamities

Weak

structure

Over loading

Injuries & Fatalities

Building damage.

All building &

sheds of the

company as

given in the Fac.

layout

Structure stability is by

competent person for

all

structure.

No overloading of

structures and

building.

Electrical

Installation

failure like

Transformer,

PCC etc.

Overload

Loose contacts

Short circuit

Fire

Suffocation of

persons inside the

plant

Electrical

transformer

switch yard

Electrical MCC

rooms

Power plant

Installation as per

electricity rules.

Other Controls

provided

Rubber mat provided

Earthing provision

1.9 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

1.9.1 General

The fire fighting system shall be installed in line with OISD – STD - 189, for hydrocarbon

production facility.

Table 6: Fire Fighting System at EPS as Per OISD 189

S.

No.

Facility Capacity/Quantity

1 Water storage tank for

fire fighting

2 Nos welded tanks of capacity 40.0 KL each

2 Fire Water pump 1800 LPM, 7.0 Kg/cm2 pressure

3 Fire water distribution 4” size pipe with a minimum distance of 15.0


DEMO

meters from the well head area

4 Hydrant Alongside to cover entire hazardous area and

distance between the two hydrants or two

monitors should not be more than 30.0 mtrs

5 Monitor Alongside to cover entire hazardous area and



6 Above ground piping Height should be 300-400 mm from the ground

and should be supported at every 0.6 m distance.

Table 7: First Aid Fire Fighting Equipment at EPS as Per OISD 189

S.

No.

Place Quantity of Fire Extinguishers

1 Separator/group unit area 2 Nos. 10 Kg DCP Extinguishers and 2 number

sand bucket under one extinguisher shed.

2 Dispatch pump area 1 No. 10 Kg DCP Extinguisher for each pump

and with a minimum of 2 Nos of 10 Kg DCP

Extinguishers, 1 No 50 liters mechanical

foam,2 Nos sand bucket.

3 Near storage tank area 2 No. 10 Kg DCP Extinguisher

5 Electrical switch gear

area/generator house

1 No 6.8 Kg CO2 Extinguisher for each unit

1 No 10 Kg DCP Extinguisher for each unit

1.10 SAFETY ORGANIZATION AND ITS ACTIVITIES

1.10.1 Construction and Erection Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of the safety

officer includes identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and

advise on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training programs and provide

professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. He is

also responsible to ensure compliance of Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions.


DEMO

1.10.2 Operation and Maintenance Phase

On completion of construction phase, the posting of safety officers would be in accordance

with the requirement of OMR 1984 and their duties and responsibilities would be as defined

thereof.

1.10.3 Strengthening of HSE and Meeting by Safety and quality circle

In order to develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of hazardous processes

and improving safety and health, safety and quality circles would be constituted in area of

work. The circle normally will meet weekly.

1.10.4 HSE Audit and inspection

HSE audits / Inspections will be carried out at site on bi-monthly basis to -

1 To identify any design deficiencies and also any weaknesses which might have

cropped up during modifications / additions of facilities.

2 To ensure that fire protection facilities and safety systems are well maintained.

3 To ensure that operating / maintenance procedures, work practices are as per those

stipulated in the manuals and standards, which might have degraded with time.

4 To check on security, training, preparedness for handling emergencies and disaster

management etc

5 To check the compliance of statutory regulations, standards, codes, etc.

1.10.5 Safety Training

Safety training would be provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance Corporate HSE

department, Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular

employees, contractor labors would also be provided safety training. To create safety

awareness safety films would be shown to workers and leaflets would be distributed.

1.11 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH SURVEILLANCE PLAN

All the potential occupational hazardous work places would be monitored regularly. The

health of employees working in these areas would be monitored periodically for early

detection of any ailment due to exposure.

For Occupational Health monitoring following plan should be implemented:

Medical Surveillance:


DEMO

All employees/ contractors should go through the medical examination once in two years to

ascertain the health status of all workers in respect of Occupational Health hazard to which

they are exposed.

Employee information and training:

The industry will provide training program for the employees to inform them of the following

aspects; hazards of operations, proper usage of nose mask and earplugs, the importance of

engineering controls and work practices associated with job assignment(s).

List of Tests to be conducted and recorded:

1. Eyes 8. Ears

2. Respirator system 9. Circulatory system (Blood Pressure)

3. Abdomen 10. Nervous System

4. Locomotor System 11. Skin

5. Hernia 12. Hydrocele

6. Urine 13. Blood for ESR Report

7. Audiogram 14. Chest X Ray

Medical Examination:

The following medical checkup/examinations should be done:

1. Comprehensive Pre-employment medical checkup for all employees.

2. X-ray of chest to exclude pulmonary TB, etc.

3. Spirometry test

4. Lung function test.

5. Liver function test (LFT)

6. Audiometer test to find deafness.

7. Vision testing (Near and far as well as colour vision)

Report of schedule medical examination:


DEMO

Report of schedule medical examination should be published within the company and also

report to higher management with safety & health magazines published within the

company. Also workers whose schedule examinations are pending to be intimated through

their respective department heads to avoid any worker / employee left out for schedule

medical examination.


DEMO

1

Disaster Management Plan 1 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

1.1 STRUCTURE

The DMP is supposed to be a dynamic, changing, document focusing on continual

improvement of emergency response planning and arrangements. A structure working on a

Plan, Do, Check & Act (PDCA) cycle has been therefore suggested. Another advantage of

doing this is to have a system that is in synchronicity with commonly used EHS systems

such as ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18000.

1.2 POLICY

The Quality Health Safety & Environment policies are to be made accessible to all at site and

to other stakeholders. The policies will be framed considering legislative compliance,

stakeholder involvement, continual improvement, and management objectives.

1.3 PLANNING

1.3.1 Identification and Prevention of Possible Emergency Situation

Possible emergency situations can broadly be classified into toxic release, fire or explosion.

While doing so, it is stressed that these results are only for the modeled scenarios and, that

the distances as well as damages can change depending upon the actual development of a

scenario. Additional emergency situations can be developed on the basis of audit / HAZOP

or other procedures prior to commencement of operations.

Emergency Prevention

Some of the ways of preventing emergencies are as follows:

• Preparation of a Preventive Maintenance Schedule Programme covering maintenance

schedule for all critical equipment and instruments as per recommendations of the

manufacturers user manuals.

• Establishment of a Non Destructive Testing (NDT) system as necessary. This may not

be feasible in-house but there are specialized organizations who undertake the work,

and the same may be used.

• Importantly, it is of great importance to collect and analyze information pertaining to

minor incidents and accidents at the site, as well as for recording near-misses or

emergencies that were averted. These information give an indication of how likely or


DEMO

2

unlikely it is for the site to face actual emergencies and what should be further done

to prevent them from occurring.

• Establishment of an ongoing training and evaluation programme, incorporating the

development of capabilities amongst employees about potential emergencies and

ways and means of identifying and averting the same. Most emergencies do not

occur without some incident or an abnormal situation. So there is always time of few

seconds to few minutes to arrest an incident of abnormal situation from turning in to

an emergency. This is the role of the shift in-charge who is the incident controller

(IC) along with his shift team.

1.3.2 Formation of Emergency Plan Objectives

Specific objectives of the Emergency Response Plan are to be clearly listed with regards to

the responses desired for successful management of the possible emergency situations.

Suggested Objectives could, initially include:

• Formulation of suitable onsite / offsite fire release response

• Formulation of suitable onsite / offsite explosion prevention and relief response.

• Improved awareness of safety issues amongst site personnel.

• Training of key persons in Fire Fighting / First Aid -cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

• awareness programme for villagers

The objectives are suggested currently are generic in nature. However, they will evolve and

become more specific as the project develops further.

1.4 IMPLEMENTATION

1.4.1 Allocation of Resources

GSPC will require allocation of suitable resources for effective implementation of the DMP.

Resources include both human and financial resources.

1.4.2 Emergency Structure and Responsibility

The key personnel involved in the emergency response are

• Employee detecting the incident (Observer)

• Site in charge and & GSPC installation manager.

• Location Incident management Team Members of onshore Installation per Station Bill


DEMO

3

• Managing Director of GSPC

• Onshore Emergency Response Team

1.4.3 Emergency site Coordinator & Incident Management Procedure

• GSPC Emergency Site Coordinator – Initial Actions

Following the notification of an incident by the Incident Observer, the Emergency Site

Coordinator shall: -

• Confirm the Details.

• Contact the affected location and verify incident.

• Determine the category of the Incident.

• Use the Initial Notification Checklist as a guide.

• Log all information

1.4.4 Individual Incident management Team Member – Initial Actions

• Proceed immediately to your normal office.

• Arrange for incoming telephone calls to be screened and for calls pertaining to the

Incident be forwarded to the GSPC ECC.

• Issue delegations of authority and/or arrange for work matters that may arise while

you are in the GSPC Emergency Control Centre to be dealt with.

• Document any calls pertaining to the Incident that are made from your normal office

or at home and bring them to the GSPC Emergency Control Centre.

• Retrieve any relevant data and take it to the GSPC ECC when it is operational. When

advised, go to the GSPC Emergency Control Centre. Update the GSPC Chief

Emergency Coordinator that you have arrived.

• Check the Status Boards for the most recent information.

• Ensure that your telephone line is "live". Keep a record of incoming and outgoing

telephone calls, using a pre-formatted note pad.

If a material fact regarding the Incident comes to your attention, immediately advice the

Board Writer who will display the information onto the Status Board and ensure the events

log is updated.


DEMO

4

1.5 COMPOSITION OF GSPC EMERGENCY RESPONSE TEAM

Individual and alternates have been nominated to form the core GSPC ERT as under.

• Managing Director

• Chief Operating Officer

• President(field services)

• Director(operations)

• Executive Director (Finance & Admin)

• Executive director (HR )

• GM (IT)

• General Manager (Safety)

• AGM (Material and Logistic)

• Senior Manager(commercial)

• Manager(production)

• Manager (QHSE)

1.6 JOB DESCRIPTION OF EMERGENCY RESPONSE TEAM

Managing Director – Chairman ERP

• Assume overall control and ensure that the Emergency Response Plan is activated

and implemented.

• Chair and monitor the ERT review sessions.

• Inform GSPC Group

• Liaison with local, state and central Government authorities and partners such as;

DGH, Partners, DGMS, etc. on HSE issues as appropriate.

Chief Operating officer

Dy. Chairman ERP

• Assumes the duty of Alternate Chairman of ERP

• Look after Overall control of Incident.

• Keep Managing Director updated on the actions initiated.


DEMO

5

Director (operations) – Chief Emergency Coordinator

The GSPC Chief Emergency Coordinator is responsible for the incident management support

both during and outside working hours. The GSPC Chief Emergency Coordinator shall: -

• Notify the Managing Director and Chief Operating Officer of any incident and keep

him informed.

• Act as ‘Manager Emergency Response’ of the GSPC ERPT on behalf of the GSPC ERPT

Chairman.

• Decide whether or not to mobilize the GSPC ERT

• Initiate activation and call out of the GSPC ERPT.

• Initiate activation of the GSPC Emergency Control Room (ECR).

• Organize resources to support the emergency response to the incident.

• Call a meeting with Emergency Response Team in Emergency Control Room to

discuss the incident and develop a response plan

• Advice the Managing Director to notify appropriate external agencies, resource

centers and the local emergency services, if necessary. (Different persons in the

emergency Response Team should be assigned to call each of the external agencies)

The chief emergency coordinator will act as chairman of Emergency Response Team (ERT)

till MD takes the charge of ERT chairman

GM (Safety)

• Act as the focal point of Incident.

• Assess and decide category of Incident.

• Assist in preparation of update for spokesperson.

• Advice CEC regarding mobilization of GSPC ERT.

• Advice MD/CEC on restoration of any environmental damage.

• Notify the Statutory agencies as required.

Executive Director (F&A and Admin) – Finance and Insurance Coordinator

• Provide personnel as required for special accounting purposes and maintain daily

cost record throughout the incident.

• Set up separate account for qualifying the expenses related to all major incidents.


DEMO

6

• Provide experienced personnel from finance group to coordinate payment of

emergency purchases

• Liaison with insurance company and insurance representative

Senior Manager (Commercial) – Commercial Coordinator

• Direct the commercial staff to initiate for emergency purchases.

Executive Director (HR)

• Inform employees and provide updates as deemed necessary in the event of any

emergency.

• Review and provide media responses to spokes person.

• Reading for Press/Media briefing.

Assistant General Manager (Material & Logistics) – Mutual Aid / Logistics Coordinator

• Arrange for procurement of emergency supplies / contractors in coordination with

commercial coordinator.

• Provide purchasing and materials personnel.

• Contract for temporary facilities and office as required.

• Arrange for contract personnel, equipment and services to carry out operations.

• Source and supply maps of affected area.

• Arrange for recovery and disposal of damaged property, in case of oily debris co-

ordinate with the Safety/Environmental Manager as necessary.

Manager (Production)

• Coordinate with site In-charge.

• Direct the site In-Charge in consultation with Director(operations)

• Keep CEC (operations) updated on site situation.

Manger QHSE, Head Office

• Assume the role of secretary ERPT.

• Provide assistance as required on issues related to Safety and Environment.

• Assist in preparation of updates for spokesperson.

• Coordinate documentation of safety and environmental aspects of incident.


DEMO

7

• Coordinate surveillance and photo documentation.

• Assure that GSPC’s Health and Safety policies are observed.

• Report any accidents, as required, to the appropriate Regulatory Agencies.

• Provide support to plan procedures and follow-up investigations.

• Coordinate with External agencies regarding oil spill response.

GM (IT)

• Ensure adequate communication means available and operational in GSPC at

Gandhinagar office.

1.7 SETTING UP OF EMERGENCY INFRASTRUCTURE

To enable the key persons to implement the DMP, the following infrastructure will require to

be set up:

1.7.1 Site map

• Site Map with Escape Routes and Safe Assembly Points Marked on it

• Site layouts have to be put up at key areas where assembly is to be done. These

points could vary depending upon the atmospheric stability and location and intensity

of the emergency.

• With the onset of emergency, all non-essential persons (those workers not assigned

emergency duty) shall evacuate the area and report to the specified emergency

assembly point.

1.7.2 Wind Sock

It is required to install wind sock at the top of any tall structure in the vicinity of the site. In

case there is a risk of the structure getting damaged during the emergency, it is desirable to

have alternate wind sock(s) as required. At least one wind sock should be visible from any

part of the site. Site personnel have to be trained in reading the atmospheric conditions on

the basis of the status of the wind sock.

1.7.3 Evacuation, Escape and Rescue (EER) Plan

In a major emergency, it would be necessary to evacuate personnel from affected areas and

as a precaution / measure to further evacuate non-essential workers from areas likely to be

affected should the emergency escalate. Whether evacuation is required or not can be

decided by the Incident Controller, and arrangements made to communicate with


DEMO

8

employees in this regards. Arrangements could include announcements over the public

address system, or through other suitable means.

On evacuation, employees should be directed to pre-determined assembly points already

explained earlier. If they are required to be evacuated outside the site and at a remote

place, their transportation will be necessary for which vehicles will be required. At remote

shelters their care and welfare will also be through beforehand. Employees should use own

vehicles first and then use, if necessary, the mutual aid system or hired vehicles from

elsewhere. The vehicle may be needed to warn public also.

The safe passages/routes for escape shall be decided and marked by arrows in the plans as

explained in the details of Emergency Control Center in this chapter.

1.7.4 Safe Assembly Points

In affected and vulnerable locations, all non-essential persons (who are not assigned any

emergency duty) shall evacuate the area and report to a specified assembly point. The need

to evacuate non-essential - persons from non-affected areas will be determined by the

foreseeable rate at which the incident may escalate.

Each assembly point must be situated in a safe place, well away from areas of risk and least

affected by down wind direction. It may be in the open or in a building depending on hazard

involved. More than one assembly point is needed:

• To ensure that employees do not have to approach the affected area to reach the

assembly point;

• In case any assembly point lies in the path of wind-blown harmful materials, e.g.

toxic gas, burning brands, thrown (expected) materials and;

Before reaching an assembly point, or subsequently, if it is required to pass through an

effected area or the release of toxic substance, suitable personal protective equipment

(PPE) including respirator, helmets etc., should be available to the people.

1.8 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTER

An Emergency Control Centre (ECC) is the primary area from where emergencies are

handled. The Main Control Centre, or any structure on the site, at sufficient distance from

the affected area, and that is designed to withstand overpressure and radiation stress

should be designated as the ECC. However, GSPC’s emergency control center will be set up

at GSPC corporate office at Gandhinagar

An ECC should contain various items as listed:


DEMO

9

For communication:

• Intercom sets

• External phone sets

• Telephone directory

• Company Telephone Directory

• List of Important phone numbers required in emergency like Ambulance, Police,

mutual aid agency etc.

• Mobile phones

Documents for ready reference:

• Site Plan

• Layout plan with hazard zones, assembly points marked and location of siren,

safety/fire system shown (Display)

• Stock list of fire extinguishers

• Fire-water system and additional sources of water

• Emergency Response Plan

• Copy of First Aid

• MSDS of materials used in the plant

• Mutual Aid Members,

• List of employees and addresses and phones

Wall Display:

• Site plan

• Layout plan

• Emergency Organization Chart

All equipment should be regularly inspected and tested for adequacy. Personnel should be

trained in the use of the same, where special training is required. Records of the same are

to be maintained.

1.9 FIRE FIGHTING

These include the following facilities


DEMO

10

Table 1: Fire Fighting System at EPS as Per OISD 189

S.

No.

Facility Capacity/Quantity

1 Water storage tank for

fire fighting

2 Nos welded tanks of capacity 40.0 KL each

2 Fire Water pump 1800 LPM, 7.0 Kg/cm2 pressure

3 Fire water distribution 4” size pipe with a minimum distance of 15.0

meters from the well head area

4 Hydrant Alongside to cover entire hazardous area and



5 Monitor Alongside to cover entire hazardous area and



6 Above ground piping Height should be 300-400 mm from the ground

and should be supported at every 0.6m distance.

Table 2: First Aid Fire Fighting Equipment at EPS as Per OISD 189

S.

No.

Place Quantity of Fire Extinguishers

1 Separator/group unit area 2 Nos. 10 Kg DCP Extinguishers and 2 number

sand bucket under one extinguisher shed.

2 Dispatch pump area 1 No. 10 Kg DCP Extinguisher for each pump

and with a minimum of 2 Nos of 10 Kg DCP

Extinguishers, 1 No 50 liters mechanical

foam,2 Nos sand bucket.

3 Near storage tank area 2 No. 10 Kg DCP Extinguisher

5 Electrical switch gear

area/generator house

1 No 6.8 Kg CO2 Extinguisher for each unit

1 No 10 Kg DCP Extinguisher for each unit


DEMO

11

1.10 FIRST AID

Basic items in a first aid kit consist of following items:

• First aid leaflet, including CPR

• Sterilized finger dressing

• Sterilized hand or foot dressing

• Sterilized body or large dressing

• Sterilized burns dressing - small

• Sterilized burns dressing - large

• Sterilized burns dressing – extra large

• Sterilized cotton wool (25 gms)

• Cetavolon (28 gms)

• Eye pads

• Adhesive plaster

• Assorted roller bandage

• Triangular bandages

• Safety pins

• Scissors, ordinary, 12.7cms, both sides sharp

• Savlon liquid, 150 ml, or equivalent

• Cotton wool for padding, 100 gms

• Eye Ointment of sulphacetamide preparation

• Loose woven gauze (28”x8”), compressed pack

• Scribbling Pad, 4”x 6” with a pencil in a plastic cover

• Adhesive dressing strips

• Field dressing of modified army pattern

• Record cards in a plastic cover

• Torch, medium size with cells

• Eye wash


DEMO

12

• Wooden splints, small

• Wooden splints, big

1.11 AWARENESS TRAINING AND COMPETENCE

Awareness

General awareness is to be invoked in all site personnel (including contractor’s employees)

with regards to the importance of safety in general and emergency procedures in particular.

Awareness can be generated in a number of ways, some of which are:

• Awareness of Environment, Health and Safety Policies and the role of each employee

in achieving what are covered under the policies

• Awareness of the importance of carrying out tasks as mentioned in the Standard

Operating Procedures and the potential impacts of not doing so.

• The importance of use of personal protective equipment

• Awareness about relevant portions of the safety instructions covered in equipment

manuals used at site

• Celebration of National Safety day, World Environment Day, Fire week to create

awareness related to Health, safety and Environment

Training

Specific training requires to be given to key employees. Examples of such training include:

• Specific, skilled training pertaining

• Testing of critical equipment and controls

• First aid and Cardio-Pulmonary Resuscitation

• Use of firefighting equipment

• Emergency Evacuation and Rescue (EER) procedures.

• Training in use of communication procedures to be followed in case of emergencies.

• Training needs identification exercises should be undertaken prior to commencement

of operations and the same must cover environment, health and safety issues.


DEMO

13

Competence

Competence is a function of training, experience and education. Key persons involved in

administering the DMP should be competent. The level of competence can be decided for

each key task and a clearly defined competence chart should be prepared.

Communication

Communication is vital during emergencies. Under the Factories Act, as well as the MSIHC

Rules, communication is important and it is required to divulge the potential emergencies

that could arise out of the operations related to hazardous units.

After undertaking an assessment of risks and their possible environmental impacts, and

setting up an organization for the preparedness to control the emergency, including related

infrastructure, the next step is making the communications system operational. Depending

upon the severity of the event, communications may have to be made with:

• Persons inside the site premises

• Key personnel outside the site premises during their non-working hours

• Outside emergency services and authorities, and Neighboring businesses, industries

and general public.

• Requirements pertaining to communication during emergencies are covered in this

section.

1.12 LEVEL OF EMERGENCY

Three levels of emergencies are to be recognized:

• First level: Confined to a particular unit of the entire site,

• Second level: A spreading emergency, that requires outside help, and

• Third level: A major emergency requiring neighboring population to be alerted.

• Suitable alarms require to be made for each of these potential emergencies. The

alarm should be audible in every part of the site. In areas of high noise levels, an

alternative to an audible alarm, such as flashing lights may be installed.

1.12.1 Raising the First Level Emergency Alarm

Any person noticing an emergency should be able to raise or cause to be raised, the First

Level Emergency Alarm (FLEA). All employees must be trained to operate such emergency

alarms. There should be adequate places within the site, where provision to raise an alarm


DEMO

14

is available. This could be an audible warning, individual signal or message to a manned

location. Major emergencies can be avoided by doing this.

1.12.2 Raising the Second and Third Level Emergency Alarms

In case there is a risk of the event spreading beyond the original unit and / or outside the

site premises, then a second level emergency alarm can be raised. This could be across the

entire site, as opposed to the first which could be at a part of the site.

In case a third level or (major) emergency is to be declared, telephonic information to

members of the local crisis group, or in case of failure of power and formal communication

systems, and non-availability of mobile phone signals, a big bell or a messenger can be

deployed.

1.12.3 Declaring a Major Emergency

Declaration of a major emergency should never be done on whims, immature judgment or

without proper thought. Further, because of the scale of activity that will commence due to

declaration of a major emergency, it is advisable to restrict the authority to declare it, and a

limited number of persons may be invested the authority to declare such an emergency,

although care should be taken to ensure that at least one such person is always at site.

1.12.4 Identifying the Type of Emergency through an Alarm

Alarm systems vary and will depend upon the size of individual sites. The person noticing

the incident should warn all those in the site vicinity to either evacuate or take other

immediate action according to a predetermined plan. Automatic alarms may be considered.

Audible alarms include sirens or other alarms over public address systems.

Alarms for a particular type of emergency (toxic leak or fire) can be raised separately

enabling different emergency plans to be put in motion. However, this must be done after

giving due thought about avoiding confusion in the minds of the site personnel. Use of

alarms can be carried out to communicate different information such as:

• Declaration of a first level emergency by an alarm in a particular area

• Declaration of an advanced emergency situation by sounding of an alarm in the

entire site

• Declaration of a major emergency by sounding of a hooter, alarm or by

communication through phone, bell or messenger.

• Communication of Emergency


DEMO

15

• There should be an effective system to communicate emergency:

• Inside the site i.e. to the persons including key personnel and essential persons on

duty, and inside normal working hours,

• To the key personnel and essential persons not on duty and outside during normal

working hours

• To outside emergency services and the government authorities, and

• To the neighboring businesses, and public in general

Use of telephones and the role of the telephone operator

After hearing the emergency alarm and emergency declaration, or even while fast receiving

the emergency message on phone, a telephone operator (or communication officer) has to

play an important role. He should be precise, sharp, attentive and quick in receiving and

noting the message and then for immediate subsequent action of further communication.

Communication with Personnel inside the Site during the Incident

Relevant statutory information pertaining to the site must be made available beforehand,

preferably in the form of a booklet, to workers so that they can prepare themselves to

prevent or control the emergency.

In all cases, once the communication of emergency is done, through an alarm, all personnel

should be ready to undertake their roles in the same.

Communication with Personnel outside the Site during the Incident

Because of the suggested planning covered in report, key personnel will typically be

available in all shifts or on short call. But due to some reason, if some are outside or not on

duty and if their help is required, their updated details should be kept in the ECC for

communication.

As far as possible, names should be listed in the order or priority. Communicators should be

told to call in the personnel in the order given, but not to waste time and call the next in

line, returning to those who could not be contacted later.

On making contact, the communicator should give a short pre-arranged message to the

effect that an emergency has been declared at the site. While coming to the site, they

should be instructed to carry with them their identity cards in case they are stopped at road

Fields.


DEMO

16

Communication with External Emergency Services and Relevant Authorities

Communication with external agencies is important and essential, both to control the

emergency and as per regulatory compliance requirements. This is specially so for

reportable (lost time) accidents. In such cases, it is essential that the outside emergency

services as well as relevant outside agencies be informed in the shortest possible time.

Liaison at the local level will help to determine the best means for achieving this.

Relevant agencies that provide emergency services include the fire brigade, nearby

hospitals and doctors, and the police, besides senior local and district administration

personnel. Statutory information, given to such agencies in advance will help them in

arranging emergency services. Other agencies to which communication has to be made are

OISD, DGMS, SPCB, etc.

Communication with Neighboring Firms and the General Public

Telephone can be used for contact with industries in the nearby area with a view of

receiving mutual aid. However, the public in the area, in some circumstances, may require

to be informed about the emergency, which as stated earlier, should be done after careful

evaluation.

Communication with District Crisis Group and the Local Crisis Group

The general public communication will require being provided to the district administration

and this may be done by liasoning with different agencies.

1.13 EMERGENCY DOCUMENTATION AND DOCUMENT CONTROL

Documentation

Emergency documentation consists of:

• The Disaster Management Plan (this chapter) and its Annexure duly completed.

• Related Formats and Records showing compliance with these documents.

The DMP needs to be approved by management prior to issue. All documents should be

easily accessible at individual sites.

Document Control

• Documents should be legible.

• All documents should be protected against damage, deterioration and loss.

• Changes, if any, should also be approved by the Site in-charge.


DEMO

17

• Copies of the approved DMP are to be kept with the Site in-charge at the office in the

Emergency Control Centre, with the Site Main Controller.

• Obsolete documents should be marked as such, and copies of such documents are to

be collected and prevented from being used.

Emergency Control

In case of emergencies, actions can broadly be categorized into the following activities:

• Saving of human lives

• Controlling the spread of the emergency and ultimately stopping it from further

developing

1.14 ONSITE EMERGENCY CONTROL

• Shut down and Isolation: Raising the alarm, followed by immediate safe shut down

and isolation of affected areas.

• Escape, Evacuation and Rescue: Safeguarding human lives at site by commencement

of the Emergency Evacuation and Rescue Plan. Ensuring that all personnel are

accounted for and carrying out a head count of persons evacuated. Notification and

commencement of offsite emergency plan in case offsite impacts are possible.

• Stopping the development of the emergency: Control or response to the emergency

depending upon its nature (fire and explosion). Fire can be somewhat better

controlled through fire fighting, Impacts of explosions cannot be controlled once they

occur, hence efforts will require focusing on provision of relief or control of secondary

impacts (such as property damage or fires) resulting from explosions.

• Treatment of injured: First aid and hospitalization of injured persons.

• Protection of environment and property: During mitigation, efforts should be made to

prevent impacts on environment and property to the extent possible.

• Welfare of the personnel managing the emergency: Changeover, first aid and

refreshments for the persons managing the emergency.

• Informing and collaborating with statutory, mutual aid and other authorities including

those covered in the Local Crisis Group.

• Informing and assisting relatives of the victims.

• Informing the news and electronic media.


DEMO

18

• Preserving all evidences and records: This should be done to enable a thorough

investigation of the true causes of the emergency.

• Investigation and follow up: This requires to be carried out to establish preventive

measures for the future and a review of the DMP

• Ensuring safety of personnel prior to restarting of operations: Efforts require to be

made to ensure that work environment is safe prior to restarting the work.

1.15 OFF-SITE EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN

An emergency may affect areas offsite of the works as for example, an explosion can

scatter debris over wide areas and the effects of blast can cover considerable distances,

wind can spread burning brands of gases. In some cases e.g. as the result of an explosion,

outside damage will be immediate and part of the available resources of the Emergency

Services may need to be deployed in the affected areas. In any case, the possibility of

further damage may remain, e.g. as the result of further explosion or by the effect of wind

spreading burning brands of hazardous material. Management will usually need expert

advice in drawing up plans so that if such a release occurs, they will be able to collaborate

with Emergency Services to estimate as far as practicable which downwind areas are at

risk. It may be necessary to prepare in advance simple charts or tables relating the likely

spread of the vapours cloud taking into account its expected buoyancy, the local topography

and all possible weather conditions during the time of release. Advice on all these matters

can be obtained from the Meteorological Office. Any such advice will include the

recommendation that if a release occurs the local Meteorological Office (whose address is in

the telephone directory) should be contacted for the current state of the weather over a

somewhat wider area and, in the case of prolonged emergencies, information on

imminent changes in weather which may alter the areas at risk. Such information is

likely to be more specific if prior consultation has been made.

GSPC’s obligation for Generating the Offsite Emergency Plan

Offsite emergency preparedness is covered in the Chemical Accidents (Emergency Planning,

Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996.

The following are the responsibilities towards generation of the Offsite Emergency Plan:

• To provide basic information on Risk and Environmental Impact Assessment to

the Local/District Authority, Police, Fire Brigade, Doctors, surrounding industries and

the public and to appraise them on the consequences and the


DEMO

19

protection/prevention measures and control plans and seek their help to manage

the emergency.

• To assist the District Authorities in preparing the Off-site Emergency Plan.

1.16 CHECKING AND CORRECTIVE ACTION

Monitoring and Measurement

Monitoring of the planned arrangements and the implementation of the DMP are essential to

deliver the required output and enhance emergency preparedness. This includes:

• Provisions for NDT, FMECA and other tests to identify failure of critical equipment,

before it actually takes place.

• Monitoring compliance to permits and statutory requirements laid down by

regulatory authorities.

• Conducting mock drills (including fire drills) to check whether the planned

arrangements are working as per the required norms or not.

• Periodical testing of intrinsically safe equipments

• Identifying minor leaks, accidents, near misses and others incidents that can lead to

emergencies.

A detailed monitoring checklist requires being prepared and the required actions carried out,

prior to start of work.

Records

Records are a means of evaluating performance. Records include (but are not limited to):

• Regulatory records, such as permits and related documents

• Monitoring and test records

• Correspondence with relevant offsite and onsite agencies

Site management will ensure that records are properly maintained and available. It is

desirable to keep copies of all records at the site as well at the project sites, to prevent their

loss. The retention time for these records will depend upon their criticality and an ultimate

decision will require to be taken by Head Office in this regards. Legal records should be kept

permanently.


DEMO

20

DMP Audit, Non Conformance and Corrective Action and Preventive Action

Since this DMP has been designed as a dynamic document, it is required that its

performance be audited at regular intervals. Ideally, persons auditing the DMP should be

external auditors (i.e. not employed at the site being audited). The audit should result in a

set of findings that are put before the site management for review.

Audits will be periodic, at intervals that are decided by the Head Office. Audit reports shall

state the exact non-compliance with the particular clause of this DMP, and should include

steps to be taken to attain compliance, through corrective and preventive actions.

Review of Emergency Performance

The site / head office management will review the findings of the audit and the non-

compliances. It will consider whether the DMP is providing adequate safety assurance to the

management, delivering performance as desired, and whether it continues to be in the spirit

of Environment, Health and Safety Policies, and changing requirements. On the basis of

these, the management will record its decisions and consider modifying the DMP, as

deemed appropriate.

1.17 NATURAL DISASTER

Emergencies may occur due to many reasons. It may occur due to natural causes like

earthquake, cyclone, flood etc. It may occur due to malfunction of standard working

systems or practices. There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in

the abstract since this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social

environment in which it occurs. What would be consider a major disaster in a developing

country, ill equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not mean more than a

temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their wake similar

consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the local, national or international

level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes the search for the dead and

injured, medical and social care, removal of the debris, the provision of temporary shelter

for the homeless, food, clothing and medical supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of

essential services

Flood levels

Flood data of the region are as mentioned below

River : Sabarmati


DEMO

21

Station name Rasikpura

District & Taluka : Kheda

‘0’ RL in meter : 14.80 m

Observed H.F.L in RL : 19.40 m

Observed H.F.L gauge : 4.60 m

The construction of the site shall be made at the elevation as per the above observed H.F.L

values.


DEMO

Annexure 9

Applicable Legislation


DEMO

Applicable Legislation

The lists of applicable laws for the proposed EPS facilities are as follows:

• Environment Protection Act, 1986 and amendment thereof

• EIA Notification, 2006 and amendments thereof

• The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and amendment thereof

• The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and amendment thereof

• Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary movement) Rules,

2008 and amendment thereof

• The Noise (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000

• Petroleum Act, 1934

• Oil Mines Regulation, 1984

EIA Notification – Environmental Clearance

As per the new EIA notification SO no. 1533 dated 14 September 2006 issued by Ministry of

Environment and Forests, any project or activity including Offshore and Onshore Oil and

Gas Exploration, Development and Production (which falls under projects or activities

listed under category A in the Schedule), requires prior Environmental Clearance from

Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), Government of India. The new notification

divides all projects in to two categories i.e. category A and B, based on spatial extent of

potential impacts on human health and natural and manmade resources. All ‘category A’

projects or activities require environmental clearance from the MoEF, Government of India

on recommendations of the Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) while projects under

‘category B1’ (Category B is subdivided into B1 and B2) require prior clearance from State

/Union territory Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA), based on

recommendations of a State level Expert Advisory Committee (SEAC).

The proposed onshore oil and gas development project falling under Category A will require

Environmental Clearance from MoEF.

The proposed onshore oil and gas re-development project will be falling under Category A

as per the EIA Notification 2006 and would require prior Environmental Clearance from

MoEF.

2) Scoping


DEMO

Projects or activities falling under Category A and B1 are required to determine the Terms of

Reference (TOR) for preparation of an EIA report.

The new EIA notification being recently released and EIA for the project started prior to

release of EIA notification, the EIA report is as per the suggested table of contents of the

EIA notification 2006.

3) Public Consultation

All projects or activities under Category A and B1 will undertake Public Consultations except

for exemptions made for certain kind of projects. No exemption is applicable for oil and gas

projects. Public Consultations will have two components i.e. a) public hearing at the district

level, conducted by the State Pollution Control Board; and b) SPCB receiving responses in

writing from concerned persons with stakes in the project.

The proposed development and production project field falls in Dholka District.

4) Appraisal

EAC at MoEF will undertake appraisal of the project based on Application for Environmental

Clearance;

• Final EIA report; and

• Outcome of public consultations.

The appraisal will be completed within 60 days of the receipt of the application and final EIA

report.

Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 has a broad coverage in which ‘Environment’

includes water, air and land and there exists an interrelationship among water, air, land,

human beings and other creatures. It empowers to take measures in protecting and

improving the quality of the environment through preventing, controlling and abating

environmental pollution. The Government is authorized to set national standards for

ambient environmental quality and controlling discharges to regulate industrial locations, to

prescribe procedure for hazardous substance management and to collect and disseminate

information regarding environmental pollution. The Act provides for severe penalties for

those who fail to comply with or contravenes any provision of the Act.

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 Including Rules 1982, 1983

and 1987.

For setting up a new project, prior Consent to Establish (CTE) or No Objection Certificate

(NOC) is required under the Air Act as per the prescribed format for the application and


DEMO

applicable fees. Before operational phase of a project, there is requirement of Consent to

Operate (CTO).

For the proposed project, prior NOC and Consent to Operate from Gujarat Pollution Control

Board is required. The application for facilitation of public consultation required under the

EIA notification will have to be filed along with application for NOC.

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution), Act, 1974 including Rules, 1975

(as amended up to 1988)

This Act provides for the prevention and control of water pollution and maintaining or

restoring good water quality for any establishment. For setting up a new project, prior

Consent to Establish (CTE) or No Objection Certificate (NOC) is required under Water Act as

per the prescribed format for the application and applicable fees. Before operational phase

of a project, there is requirement of Consent to Operate (CTO).

For the proposed project, prior NOC and Consent to Operate would be required from Gujarat

Pollution Control Board under the Water Act. The application for facilitation of public

consultation required under the EIA notification will have to be filed along with application

for NOC.

Manufacture Storage & Import of Hazardous Chemicals (MSIHC) Rules 1989 and

amendment 2000

These rules apply to the activities, which involve handling, storage and import of hazardous

chemicals as specified in Part 2 of Schedule 1 of the Rules. The indicative criteria are

specified in the Part 1 of the same schedule. The rule also applies to the industrial activity

involving isolated storage in the quantities mentioned in Schedule 2. The information on

various requirements and clearances under the MSIHC Rules will have to be furnished to the

SPCB office.

The MSIHC Rules also require provision for the proper storage and handling of chemicals.

Definition and classification of the chemicals as dangerous/hazardous is specified under the

MSIHC Rules and listed in Schedules 1, 2 & 3.

For the proposed oil development, the handling of any of the hazardous chemicals covered

under these rules will be properly classified, labeled and stored. For classification the

indicative criteria refers to the acute toxicity, flammable or explosive characteristics of the

chemical. It would be the general responsibility of GSPC to classify and properly label all the

hazardous substances being handled at it production/terminal site. The classification codes

used for labeling purpose should include corrosive, explosive, reactive, flammable or toxic.


DEMO

The Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 as amended in

2003 and 2004

The Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules 1989 were introduced under

Sections 6, 8, and 25 of the Environment (Protection) Act of 1986 (referred to as HWMH

Rules 1989). The HWMH Rules, 1989 provide for the control of generation, collection,

treatment, transport, import, storage and disposal of wastes listed in the schedules annexed

to these rules. The rules are implemented through the State Pollution Control Boards

(SPCB) Pollution Control Committees in the states and UTs respectively. With the 2003

amendment, these rules have become quite comprehensive. The rules define responsibility

of hazardous wastes generators, require safe handling practices and maintenance of

manifest system during transport of hazardous waste and also describe technological

aspects to be followed up by re-refiners and recyclers of hazardous wastes. The rules also

cover liabilities of occupier, transporters and operator of a facility for any damage caused

due to improper handling and disposal of hazardous wastes for reinstating or restoring

environmental damages caused. The occupier of hazardous waste collection, storage,

transportation and disposal requires prior permit called “authorization” under the rules.

Under the rules the occupier of a unit requires prior authorization i.e. permission for

collection, transport, treatment, reception, storage and disposal of hazardous wastes, to be

granted by the competent authority (GPCB) as per Form 1 of the Rules.

S.O. 123(E). - The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 dated 14

February, 2000

Due to the increasing ambient noise levels in public places from various sources; industrial

activity, construction activity, generator sets, loud speakers, public address systems, music

systems, vehicular horns and other mechanical devices have deleterious effects on human

health and the psychological well being of the people, it was considered necessary to

regulate and control noise producing and generating sources with the objective of

maintaining the ambient air quality standards. In this respect following noise quality

standard was suggested.

Ambient Noise Quality Standards in respect of public places

Area

Code

Category of

Area/Zone

Limits in dB(A) Leq *

Day time Night time

(A) Industrial area 75 70


DEMO

(B) Commercial area 65 55

(C) Residential area 55 45

(D) Silence zone 50 40

Day time shall mean from 6.00 a.m. to 10.00 p.m. Night time shall mean from 10.00 p.m.

to 6.00 a.m.

Oil Mines Regulations 1984

Oil Mines Regulations 1984 (OMR) is one of the subordinate legislation of the Mines Act,

1952. Besides covering detailed technical and administrative requirements, the OMR covers

among others safety aspects, storage of material and protection against pollution of

environment. The provisions aims at ensuring protection against pollution of environment

arising out of discharge of formation water, oil, drilling fluid, waste, chemical substances or

refuse from a well, tank or other production installation which may:

• Create hazard to public health and safety;

• Run into or contaminate any fresh water structure or body of water or remain in a place

from which it might contaminate any fresh water or body of water; and

• Run over or damage any land, highway or public road.

The gas produced at any installation shall not be discharged to the atmosphere unless

burnt. The gas to be burned shall be discharged from a flare line in the following manner:

1. The flare-line shall terminate with the vertical rise of at least 9 m or such greater height

as may be required by the Regional Inspector by an order in writing;

2. The flare-line shall be adequately anchored and provided with suitable means to prevent

extinction of the flame; and

3. When the gas-flow is intermittent, the flare-line shall be provided with a remote

controlled electrical ignition device to ensure continuous ignition of the emitted gases.

The proposed drilling will follow up of various provisions of the OMR including measures

specified for safety, health and protection against pollution of environment.

The Petroleum Act, 1934 and the Petroleum Rules, 1976


DEMO

This Act and Rules provide procedures and safety measures to be taken up for handling,

storage and transportation of petroleum products. The Rules define the quantity and class of

petroleum for which prior permission from the concerned authorities are required. The

storage requiring prior licenses are as following:

Petroleum class A (having flash point less than 23ºC) not intended for sale of the total

quantity in possession does not exceed 30 litres. Petroleum Act, 1934, Section 8);

Petroleum class B (having flash point from 23 to 65ºC) if the total quantity in possession at

any one place does not exceed 2,500 litres and none of it is contained in a receptacle

exceeding 1,000 litres; (Petroleum Act, 1934, Section 7);

Petroleum class C (having flash point above 65 to 93ºC) if the total quantity in possession

at any one place does not exceed 45,000 litres (Petroleum Act, 1934, Section 7).

The proposed project will store High Speed Diesel (Class B petroleum) to run diesel

generators of quantity less than 2500 litres and storage of crude oil at GCS, GSPC will take

prior approval from Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organization (formerly Chief Controller

of Explosives), Nagpur and follow up of safety measures for the storage of diesel (petroleum

products) and crude oil under the Rules.

ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS REQUIRED FOR THE PROJECT

The proposed project of exploratory drilling of four wells being covered Environment Impact

Assessment Notification 2006, requiring prior Environmental Clearance from MoEF, will

require the following permits:

1. Public Consultation to be conducted by GPCB;

2. Consent to Establish from GPCB under the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution)

Act, 1974 and the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981;

3. Environmental Clearance from Ministry of Environment and Forests, Government of India;

4. Consent to Operate from GPCB under the Water and Air Acts

6. Authorization for collection, treatment, transportation and disposal of Hazardous Wastes

under Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 as amended in 2003 and

2004;

7. Storage Licenses for Crude Oil and Diesel from Petroleum and Explosives Safety

Organization, Nagpur


DEMO

8. Notify Director General of Mines and Safety (DGMS) before commencement of

exploratory, appraisal and development drilling in the Field as well expansion and operation

of GCS; and

9. Approval from District Collector for land required for drilling locations on lease basis from

the respective landowners.

Directorate General of Hydrocarbons (DGH)

The Directorate General of Hydrocarbons (DGH) is a nodal agency of Ministry of Petroleum

and Natural Gas to ensure optimum exploitation, review/ approve development plans, work

programs, budget, reservoir evaluation, advice on mid-course corrections and appraisal of

work program and monitoring of oil and gas exploration and exploitation activities.

The DGH also advise Government on safety norms and framing regulations on safety in

oilfield operations, prescribe pollution control measures, assist in inspection and periodic

safety audit of field installations/rigs of all Production Sharing Contract operators as well

inspections to monitor stipulations of MoEF/SPCB.

Oil Industry Safety Directorate

Oil Industry Safety Directorate (OISD) is a technical directorate under the Ministry of

Petroleum and Natural Gas that formulates and coordinates the implementation of a series

of self regulatory measures aimed at enhancing the safety in the oil & gas industry in India.

The Safety Council / Safety Directorate does not supplant or, in any way take away the

present responsibilities of various statutory agencies like DGMS, CCE, Inspectorate of

Boilers, Factories Inspectors etc. It also does not dilute the responsibilities of the Chief

Executives of the oil industry, who are ultimately responsible for the safety measures in

their organizations.


DEMO

Annexure 10

Ambient Air Quality Report


DEMO

SAMPLING LOCATION: AQ 1 4..*L ayw,qU

l2_ - ol

13 , L2-

iSzrah-r,,-c Qu"U't t'F'u


DEMO

SAMPLING LOCATION: AQ 2

gQrq+u.t o0 Que"t b/La5cr:


DEMO

II

tI

I

SAMPLTNG LOCATTON: AO 3 RqrtraJ'

ll',rq

bt) Qucaul *^r^T*.V


DEMO

SAMPLING LocArIoN: AO 4 S?-+llual

lz. )-3

3i3'na*une-


DEMO

SAMPLING LOCATIoN: AO 5 KAf o f^i

5rJ,rrafu.rt "€ Q.ta,t +1


DEMO

SAMPLING LOCATION: AO 6 dfra-tr^-)

u^ry


DEMO

Annexure 11

Ground and Surface Water Quality Report


DEMO

€Frh

r-

rh/

/

\o;Kf,a1Ucg

pI"n

+J}{-

Az

c{roa:

o-flo

\oo- d

d di1r

ot4

\oo

ct)

'oF-VJ

)c-Fr

o

FI

in(ri>9v4q

oIo(y"

-T-en a2

=IJ

0)_

o2

(9 o2 I

J.}fm

IJ I

\0np

1o2

IrGi>rrh Ivt

oc.l(,-lY

Ao6-

I<0

o2

od.

b.'a

A2

<e

a

)o

J

-o|o

a2

os9

Iro\0

cns.D

os-r

oc(

i?o:FJ\JI

psr3

=Od

c_J

#?2

$ArJ

A2 q

0

)"o

<-0<l) a

2

o-rm

\v)

oV\

op-t4

oI o4

;i(,;o

e.O !,15e

Ic\{oI

d+-f

o1

crls

\J"d0

-D

z I s 1)EF^/

p=q.lr

!no--x-

Jd

ocn

*IFI"j

o\0v

cr)<o

Fo7 (^ o

2o4

lp:YCT

d.

roo.6

Pt40r)

fdon

pEtrY"\

olt'o14

0q.s o

..(

U)

Ff

T(Jo-sF

1

1-n€

J

=E

1r 1r1R

E

t'F

-l

FJ

?tr

+f;

T3ift

JT:

gq=

t

lioo

tr

0)|rI

lr(l)

(.)(-

>.

o

F

O

olioc)

t!

ol

zoli

z

z\-7o-!sz

at

.t) g-ii9dY

d.

v)U)

r)

o

O

bo

.t)()bo

Oc)

L)

(J

(t)()P

C)

v).t)(.)

EH

>' Q(hc)

Sr

dQ

s

U)

C)e

a

O

Tra c.l c.) + rn \o r\ 00 o\ C-l ca + (a) \o

0FF1

a

OaFl

Z


DEMO

€Fra

FF]

F-

3

QJ.F-

U)

t=

Fa I\o

F0 a

in

FO

trqC\\

qY

P\c,i"

9qa,

-lw

.>

=c)

e

noL;tn

\9:9

il-r

sFo

o5\9

F+

oI

t-.a? t

o/f+

AL

?a

F0

trp\t(X

qrcv

o-

o<-o

lV̂)_-DnO

AL

rIr6

AL

(\l

Fao,r(h

otr)-l-

T.-9

(L

;o

c4

a;

Foaacrr

q.(&

Ol:ts

"(o4

A2

\d?o

\s

;(n

f-)

Tr-s L){\<

Js5-F

(r=!r5

Yf5

\-{6:

t0)C)d

l-r

|r

k

C)14

P)

oti

()trE1 ()

ITaF

N

zC)

!

z

zoLr

z

ct)

(t)

-0)A:

d;

tV) c.l ca .v t-- oo

\9o

c{,)

+r+-

; zr

d

xI

\-

e,-p

€?a

os-

I

o{

.\\-

('()€\9

f\Fdo

a

N

:6

tz

Acl

4a\-

I

rL;

trf€l

€|\\^=

cIp<)o

<D

6

C>

?e

p"Yo

M r+:o

\ncn

j.

?=

-IcfE

Iq-I

+F5

d

U)

()

a

ol.i

-i.r

aF

r-. ooc.l


DEMO

'./

/ ,/

oM t^

cr\

pV

oe-Nq''

dfb

S

o^(

I ftT-rl

"Bco\o

gF

J

Y.h

#:e"nC\n

->{o

E-

tc

-N

cpdo.A

o.d

<e

e(u, o

I{o\s

F/tnr

e\)(o

a,rb

J c-D

tJI\\

cnvo

c\c\"t

oo

(p

IG9

o-O

hJ:r Ff

qc

trF+

=

o\,ttJ

sF$\4

Fft-.s

o*or

\l4J*s- -c$

dTc.l

-qD'],1/ ^

o\

;RID5q

o<D

^t

c.lc\

rf4D

\oJ\9

Ms--t

A2

ab-.9

*ss-c{

IqS

\B$P\9

cnn/]

{5-N

\4I e

L

?ato-5\

o

o"-+

Afri

I

f^\9

o \oF-

cc

F\<

s0o-r

\co\o

F.I-6

\9o

c\trt-

.9{co.V

Cc\

o

F.oo

tr s

tF-3

tG!

j:E3

tr 1>GF

2

{

TJ-5

={

,F.J+f

3ts

{

F 3tr

-f

F {

Fl.-F-.5

35

U)U)

--l

Qd.-o

O

bI)

6

a(.)

bo

tcc

zF

a

r)C)r-|-

r'\

(-)|Tr

a0.)

a'1

-o

(t)q)c)-li

>'I

-

rl

aC)

li

()

a(.)

a

(t)>.

ra)

d.0.)bo

H

-o

-FF

!

rt)

d

au

d

ii

ch-!-

E-O

EVFZ O

c..l cr) + (a t-* ooc.l c.l

c.lcn

cac\l

sc.l


DEMO

Annexure 12

EC compliance report


DEMO

Environment Clearance Compliance Report

F. No. J‐11011/1046/2007‐ IA II (I) CB‐ONN‐2002/03 (Sanand Miroli Block) Page 1 of 7

Sr. No.

EC condition Compliance status

1 The Ministry of Environment and Forests has

examined the application. It is noted that the proposal is of onshore exploratory drilling for oil and gas in block CB – ONN – 2002/3 under NELP – IV in Sanand Miroli Block in Cambay Basin in Mehsana, Ahmedabad. M/s Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Ltd (GSPC) along with Prize Petroleum Company Ltd, Jubilant Capital Pvt. Ltd. (JCPL) and Geog Global Resources (Barbados) Inc proposes on shore exploratory drilling for 17 nos. well in Block CB – ONN ‐2002/3 under NELP‐IV. Seismic survey has been completed for the area. The area is mainly agricultural land with shrubs. The major surface water bodies are Sabarmati river and Narmada canal. The total block area is 285 sq km and is divided into two part A is Sanand Block and is 132 sq km and part B is Miroli comprising of 153 sq km. There is no reserve forest in the blocks. The project will be undertaken in three phases. The cost of the drill wells is Rs. 10 crores

The details of onshore exploratory drilling wells in CB – ONN – 2002/3 is as mentioned in Annexure A

2 All the onshore and offshore oil and gas exploration, development and production activities are listed at 1 (b) under A category in the schedule of EIA notification 2006 and are appraised at central level

‐‐

3 Based of the information submitted by the project authorities the Ministry of Environment and Forest hereby accords environmental clearance to the above project under the provision of EIA notification 2006 subject to strict compliance of the following specific and general condition

‐‐

SPECIFIC CONDITIONS i. Compensation for the land acquisition to the

land oustees and for standing crop shall be paid as per the National Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy (NRRP) 2007 / State Government norms. It may be ensure that compensation provided shall not be less than the norms of the NRRP‐2007

Complied. Attached Annexure – B

ii. The commitments and assurances made during public hearing/ public consultation shall be complied with.

Copy of Public Hearing and its Compliance – Attached Annexure ‐ C


DEMO



iii. The company shall comply with the guidelines for disposal of solid waste, drill cutting and drilling fluids for onshore drilling operation notified vide GSR 546 (E) dated 30th August 2005

Generated drill cuttings & Drilling wash water were collected in HDPE lined pit. Drill cuttings & wash water generated were analyzed for hazardous constituents. Since it was non hazardous, it was disposed in HDPE lined waste pit. The characteristic of waste was analyzed and the result of same is attached as Annexure – D

iv. The surface facilities shall be installed as per applicable codes and standards, international practices and applicable local regulations

OISD standards and guidelines were put in to practices.

v. The top soil removed shall be stacked separately for reused during restoration process

Complied. Attached Annexure – E (Site restored)

vi. Drilling waste water including drill cuttings wash water shall be collected in disposal pit lined with HDPE lining evaporated or treated and shall comply with the notified standards for on shore disposal. The membership of common TSDF shall be obtained for the disposal of drill cuttings and hazardous waste. Otherwise secured land fill shall be created at the site as per the design of the secured shall be approved by the CPCB and obtain the authorization of the SPCB. Copy of authorization or membership of TSDF shall be submitted to Ministry’s Regional Office at Bhopal

The details of waste water generated and its disposal is as mentioned in annexure F Drill cutting/ drilling fluid containing oil more than 10 mg/ kg were sent to common TSDF site and the membership for same was obtained by the company

vii. The company shall construct the garland drain all around the drilling site to prevent run off of any oil containing waste in to the nearby water bodies

Wherever possible garland drains were constructed around the sites, At most areas, precautions were taken to prevent oil spillages and their runoff into nearby water bodies

viii. The recyclable waste (oily sludge) and spend oil shall be disposed to the authorized recyclers

The used oil generated was send to authorized recyclers and the copy of manifest for same is attached as Annexure G

ix. Only water based drilling mud shall be used. The drilling mud shall be recycled. In case of use of synthetic oil based mud due to any problem due to geological formation for drilling, low toxicity, oil based mud (OBM) having aromatic content < 1 % shall be used. If it is intended to use such

No synthetic oil based mud were used for drilling purpose Water based drilling mud were used and the same were recycled within the drilling site and reused


DEMO



OBM/ SBM to mitigate specific hole problem, it should be intimated to Ministry of Environment and Forests/ SPCB

x. Quantities of storage and chemicals and additives required for drilling mud preparation shall be below the specified storage permitted under the MSIHC rules

Chemicals used for mud preparation were non hazardous in nature. Precautionary measures were taken as per MSIHC rules

xi. Pre hire rig inspection, safety meeting, tool box meeting, job safety analysis and audits shall be carried out to identify hidden/ potential hazardous

Complied – Attached Annexure H

xii. The company shall take necessary measures to prevent fire hazards, containing oil spill and soil remediation as needed. At place of ground flaring, the overhead flaring stack with knockout drums shall be installed to minimize gaseous emissions during flaring.

GSPC had carried out the work as per the Petroleum standards; All OISD and relevant standards /procedures were followed to prevent fire hazards & containing oil spill. Fire fighting facilities were provided at site as per OISD 189. NO Flaring, Since this was only Drilling activity

xiii. The company shall take necessary measures to reduce noise levels at the drill site by providing mitigation measures such as proper acoustic enclosures to the DG set and meet the norms notified by the MoEF. Height of all the stacks/vents shall be provided as per the CPCB guidelines.

Hierarchy of control was followed to avoid and eliminate noise source. However wherever noise source could not be avoided, Required PPE’s were being provided to bring down the noise levels.

GSPC has hired the services of MoEF recognized laboratory to monitor the noise levels at site. Attached Annexure I

xiv. To prevent fire and explosion at Oil and Gas facility, potential ignition sources should be kept to a minimum and adequate separation distance between potential ignition sources and flammable material should be in place.

Complied, which was ensured during internal HSE inspection.

xv. The company shall develop a contingency plan for H2S release including all necessary aspects from evacuation to resumption of normal operations. The workers should be provided with personal H2S detectors in locations of high risk of exposure along with self containing breathing apparatus.

During drilling operations 2 stationed H2S detectors and one mobile detector were made available at site for regular monitoring but did not notice presence of H2S. H2S contingency plan – Attached Annexure – J


DEMO



xvi. To prevent well blowouts during drilling operations, Blow Out Preventor (BOP) system shall be installed. Blow Out Prevention System during drilling shall focus on maintaining well bore hydrostatic pressure by proper pre well planning and drilling fluid logging etc.

Drilling operations carried out by installing the Blow Out Preventor and it was tested regularly

xvii. The company shall take measures after completion of drilling process by well plugging and secured enclosures, decommissioning of rig upon abandonment of the well and drilling site shall be restored the are in original condition. In the event that no economic quantity of hydrocarbon is found a full abandonment plan shall be implemented for the drilling site in accordance with the applicable Indian Petroleum Regulations.

In the event that no economic quantity of hydrocarbon was discovered, GSPC’s well defined drilling and well abandonment procedures were implemented and site was restored to its original condition. The photograph of site restoration is attached as annexure E

xviii. Occupational health surveillance of the workers shall be carried out as per the prevailing Acts and Rules.

Complied.

xix. In case the commercial viability of the project is established, the Company shall prepare a detailed plan for development of oil and gas fields and obtain fresh clearance from the Ministry.

Complied. As per the commercial viability at EPS M1 and M1 A1, company has applied for fresh clearance to Ministry.

GENERAL CONDITIONS: i. The project authorities must strictly adhere to

the stipulations made by the Gujarat State Pollution Control Board, the State Government and any other statutory.

NOC from GPCB was obtain and complied. Attached Annexure K

ii. No further expansion or modification in the project shall be carried out without prior approval of the Ministry of Environment & Forests. In case of deviations or alternations in the project proposal from those submitted to this Ministry for clearance, afresh reference shall be made to the Ministry to assess the adequacy of conditions imposed and to add additional environmental protections measures required, if any.

Well Noted.

iii. The emissions of (RSPM, SPM, SO2, NOx, HC and VOC) from DG set and from flare stack shall confirm to the standards prescribed by the SPCB. Regular monitoring of ambient Air for HC and VOC shall be carried out as per CPCB guidelines. Stack height attached to DG sets shall be in –

AAQ monitoring was carried out quarterly. Attached Annexure L


DEMO



conformance with the environment protection acts and rules.

iv. The project authorities must strictly comply with the rules and regulations under Manufacture, Storage and import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 as amended subsequently. Prior approvals from Chief Inspectorate of Factories, Chief Controller of Explosives, Fire Safety Inspectorate etc must be obtained, wherever applicable.

Chemicals were stored on requirement basis only, MSIHC rules, Not applicable.

v. The project authorities must strictly comply with the rules and regulation with regard to handling and disposal of Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989/2003 where ever applicable. Authorization from the State Pollution Control Board must be obtained for collections/treatment /storage/disposal of hazardous wastes.

Generated drill cuttings & Drilling wash water were collected in HDPE lined pit. Drill cuttings & wash water generated were analyzed for hazardous constituents by MoEF recognized laboratory. Since it was non hazardous, it was disposed in HDPE lined waste pit. Attached Annexure – D Used oil generated were handed over to authorized recyclers

vi. The overall Noise levels in and around the plant area shall be kept within the standards by providing noise control measures including acoustic hoods, silencers, enclosures etc. On all sources of noise generation. The ambient noise levels shall conform to the standards prescribed under EPA rules 1989 viz 75 dBA (daytime) and 70 dBA (nighttime).

Hierarchy of control was followed to avoid and eliminate noise source. However wherever noise source could not be avoided, Required PPE’s were being provided to bring down the noise levels.

GSPC has hired the services of MoEF recognized laboratory to monitor the noise levels at site. Attached Annexure I

vii. A separate Environmental Management Cell equipped with full fledged laboratory facilities must be set up to carry out the Environmental management and monitoring functions.

GSPC has hired the service of MoEF recognized laboratory to carry out Environment Monitoring at site.

viii. The project authorities will provide adequate funds both recurring and noncurring to implement the conditions stipulated by the Ministry of Environment and Forests as well as the State Government along with the implementation schedule for all the conditions

Drilling is a short term activity. However Drilling budget included Budget for Environment Monitoring at and site restoration, which were utilized accordingly.


DEMO



stipulated herein. The funds so provided shall not be diverted for any other purposes.

ix. The regional office of this Ministry at Bhopal/Central Pollution Control Board/State Pollution Control Board will monitor the stipulated conditions. A Six monthly compliance report and the monitored data along with statistical interpretation shall be submitted to them regularly.

Complied. Attached Annexure M

x. The project proponent shall inform the public that the project has been accorded environmental clearance by the Ministry and copies of the clearance letter are available with the State Pollution Control Board/ Committee and may also be seen at website of the Ministry and Forests at http:/WWW.envfor.nic.in. This shall be advertised within seven days of the issue of this letter in at least two local newspapers that are widely circulated in the region of which one shall be in the vernacular language of the locality concerned.

Couldn’t be published in newspaper, as EC was received very late, however is displayed on GSPC website. www.gspcgroup.com

xi. The project authorities shall inform the Regional Office as well as the Ministry, the date of financial closure and final approval of the project by the concerned authorities and the date of commencing the land developmental work.

NA

xii. The Ministry may revoke or suspend the clearance, if implementation of any of the above conditions is not satisfactory.

Agreed

xiii. The Ministry reserves the right to stipulate additional conditions if found necessary. The Company in a time bound manner will implement these conditions.

Agreed

xiv. The above conditions will be enforced, inter alia under the provisions of the Water (Prevention &

Agreed


DEMO



control of pollution) Act, 1974, The Air (Prevention & control of pollution) Act,1981, The Environment (Protection) Act,1986, Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules, 1989, 2003 and the Public Liability Insurance act 1991 along with their amendments and rules.


DEMO

Details of Drilling wells in block CB – ONN – 2002/3 under NELP – IV in Sanand Miroli Block in Cambay Basin in Mehsana, Ahmedabad

Sr No.

Well Area Survey no. Village Taluka District Drilling Period

Total days of rig mobilization

1 M #1 Ambaliyara 832,833,835,836 Ambaliyara Dholka Ahmedabad 37 days

37 days

2 M#4 Bakrol 513/A,B, 514, 515, 512, 500+501, 517, 516, 525, 518, 523, 522, 529, 383, 382, 381, 380, 379, 378, 377, 475, 476, 482, 508, 480, 507, 481, 506, 488, 503, 504, 505, 505, 505.

Bakarol & Vishalpur

Daskroi Ahmedabad 30 days

30 days

3 M#2 Miroli 468, 469, 470, 470, 471, 471, 472, 474.

Miroli Daskroi Ahmedabad 57 days

57 days

4 SE#4 Manipur 17, 18, 19, 24. Manipur Daskroi Ahmedabad 30 days

30 days

5 SE#2 Manipur 17, 18. Manipur Daskroi Ahmedabad 45 days

45 days

6 SE#3 Manipur 17, 18, 19, 24. Manipur Daskroi Ahmedabad 71 days

71 days

7 M#3 Saroda 451, 453/10, 683, 453/10, 453/9, 453/7, 451, 751, 753, 750.

Saroda Dholka Ahmedabad 44 days

44 days

8 M#7 Saroda 801/1, 801/1, 815. Saroda Dholka Ahmedabad 49 49 days

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-A The Details of Onshore Exploratory Drilling Wells in CB - ONN - 2002/3

days 9 M#6 Ambaliyara 862, 873, 915, 866, 865, 863,

867, 874, 875. Ambaliyara Dholka Ahmedabad 33

days 33 days

10 M#1A1 Ambaliyara 827, 828, 829, 830P, 833, 832. Ambaliyara Dholka Ahmedabad 27 days

27 days

11 SE#8 Jhalora 344/1, 344/4, 344/2, 362, 363, 356, 361.

Jhalora Kadi Mehsana 19 days

19 days

12 SE#9 Nandoli 225, 225, 225, 232, 231, 216. Nandoli Kalol Gandhinagar 23 days

23 days

13 SE#5 17, 18, 19, 24. Manipur Daskroi Ahmedabad 40 days

40 days

14 M#5 Kadariyapur 429/76, 429/49, 429/51, 429/11, 429/9, 429/8, 429/7, 429/6, 429/5, 443/P-18, 453/15, 453/6, 446, 453/13, 452, 451, 429/77

Chandisar & Saroda

Dholka Ahmedabad 70 days

70 days

15 SE#11 Bavlu 1844, 1850, 1854, 1855, 1856, 1853/B

Bavlu Kadi Mehsana 34 days

34 days

16 SE#10 Garodiya 251/1, 251/2P, 251/3, 251/3, 251/5, 251/4, 249P

Garodiya Daskroi Ahmedabad 30 days

30 days

17 SE 14 Thol 479 Thol Kalol Gandhinagar 14 days

14 days

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-B Land Agreement Document

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-C Copy of Public Hearing and its Compliance


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO

Type of waste Quantity Disposal Plan

Waste drill

cutting

150 MT/

well

Drill cutting/ drilling fluid containing oil

more than 10 mg/ kg were sent to TSDF

Drilling mud and drill cuttings were stored

in HDPE line pit at drilling site for

evaporation. After completion of drilling,

the same were covered with impervious

liner and filled with top soil

Drill fluid ~1000

m3/well


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-D The Characteristic of Waste

EFFLUENT ANALYSIS REPORT*

Name of industry : M/s.Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Ltd.

Sampling Point : Drilling Cutting SE 10

Sample No. : 10/574/08

Sampling Date : 23.10.2008

Type of Collection : Grab

Reporting Date : 13.11.2008

Sample Collected by M/s. Kadam Environmental Consultants

PARAMETERS ANALYSED UNIT : RESULTS On-Shore Discharge

Standards

Total Chromium mg/lit. : Nil 1.00

Hexa Chromium mg/lit. : Nil 0.10

Copper mg/lit. : 0.106 0.20

Lead mg/lit. : Nil 0.10

Nickel mg/lit. : Nil 3.00

Cadmium mg/lit. : 0.024 -

Arsenic mg/lit. : Nil -

Oil & Grease mg/lit. : Traces 10

• * * Analysis Method : reference – STANDARD METHODS for the Examination of Water and Waste

water- Prepared and jointly Published by : American Public Health, Association American Water Works

Association , Water Pollution Control Federation


DEMO

Ple

ase

regi

ster

PD

F S

plitt

er a

nd M

erge

r

DE

MO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-E Photograph of Site Restoration

Waste Water Generation

Waste water

generated

Quantity Disposal Plan

Wash water 25 KLD/

well

Waste water generated was

collected in HDPE lined pit for and

later were evaporated.

At decommissioning of drill well

the waste pit was covered with

impervious liner and a thick layer

of top soil was laid on the same


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-F The Details of Waste Water Generated


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-G Copy of Manifest for Used Oil


DEMO

HSE Inspection

Date of Inspection: 5th

September 2008.

Location: SE #11,

Rig : DR -5; Owned and operated by M/s Dewanchand

Inspection carried out by:

1. Mr. Ajay Patel (Manager – QHSE)

2. Mr. Rakesh Panchal (Drilling Engineer)

During a short visit of rig DR -5, a site HSE inspection was carried out on 5th

September at

SE # 11 location, as preparation to spud the well was in progress. Following observations we

had.

• Aviation light seems dim.

• Poor illumination at site.

• Mast doesn’t have proper lights.

• Fire extinguishers which we checked, approx 60-70% were found not in order i.e.

pressure gauge showed no or less pressure.

• One of Fire Extinguisher, we observed in which Safety pin was not secured properly.

• One fire extinguisher put on rig floor having capacity of 10 Kg, when we lifted it

then we found that the cartridge was loose. (hitting the inner container)

• DCP fire extinguisher (big) were placed much closed to the Generator sets, even

small fire extinguisher of 5 kg were placed on floor of generator room flooring.

• One of electrical cable for light having three improper joints at very short intervals.

• All the ladders approaching to Rig floor were not installed / fitted properly (one bolt

each side )

• Main ladder leading to Rig Floor (Dog House) having damaged / improper steps

which may lead to accident. Even the railing of the same ladder is not proper

(straight). The First step of this ladder at rig floor is not straight (slanting), which is

more dangerous for anybody who is stepping down from rig floor.

• Even the face plats of ladder were observed in such a way so that it may create

tripping Hazard to individual.

• Rig floor is uneven which may lead to trip / fall hazard to the crew working on rig

floor.

• Two eye stations were observed one on rig floor ( out side the Dog house) which

does not have enough pressure of water to wash eyes where as second one was

installed at Mud tank area which was open and dust found in the water which was

less.

• Gratings on mud tank found uneven and some of them required immediate

replacement.

• Fire Fighting pump and accessories were not at site.

• Only two safety belts were at site.

• Top Man Escape device was not properly tightened and clamped.

Your immediate attention is required on above issues and further you are requested to come

up with action plan with tentative date of completion of each poinr latst by 8th

Sept 2008.


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-H HSE Inspection Report


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-I Reports of Noise Monitoring


DEMO

Contingency Plan for Handling H2S

The possibility of Presence/release of Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S) gas is almost negligible during drilling operation in KG-Onland Block. Even though the Multiple H2S detectors will be installed at different places at drill site for detection of presence of H2S during drilling operation as precautionary measure. Monitoring of H2S gas will be practiced frequently during drilling activity and data will be maintained at site.

The purpose of this contingency plan is to educate the employee for H2S identification and to reduce hydrogen sulfide (H2S) exposure to below the Permissible Exposure Limit.

H2S Characteristic Color Colorless Odor “Rotten eggs” (detectable at 10 ppb) Toxicity Highly toxic Flammability Flammable

Solubility 0.4%

Incompatibilities Strong oxidizers, strong nitric, acid, metal

Exposure to hydrogen sulfide above published limits can result in adverse health effects including:

• Eye irritation • Lung effects • Central Nervous System effects on parts of the brain that control breathing • Shock, convulsions and death at high exposures

Symptoms of hydrogen sulfide exposure include:

• Eye irritation • Nose and throat irritation • Headache, dizziness • Nausea • Cough, breathing difficulty

Exposer Limits:

Permissible Exposure limit (PEL) for H2S is 10 ppm for eight-hour time-weighted average (TWA8) or 15 ppm for Short Term Exposure limit (STEL) as averaged over 15 minutes.


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-J Contingency Plan for Handling H2S Release

Contingency Plan for Handling H2S

In case of unexpected release of H2S gas below Guidelines to be followed.

• The person detecting the H2S must IMMEDIATELY notify the driller. The

driller will, in turn, notify the Toolpusher and/or the Drilling Superintendent.

• The drilling operation will be stopped immediately untill the drill site will be

decleared free and safe from H2S.

• Hold their breath if air breathing equipment is not available;

• Rapidly evacuate the area containing the H2S and move crosswind direction if

possible;

• move up assembly point or safest area.put on a BA by only trained person;

• Evacuate anyone who may be affected by the gas to a safe area; administer

resuscitation or oxygen as needed or seek external medical aid at nearest

hospital

• Put on air breathing equipment before helping anyone overcome by H2S;

• Quickly evacuate to the assigned or announced safe-briefing area to receive

instructions from supervisory personnel; and

Don’t create/be panic.

Monitoring / Observation During Specific Operations

During drilling operations the H2S levels indicated by the monitors must be continuously observed during the following operations after penetrating a zone where H2S was identified during drilling:

1. When pulling a wet string of drillpipe

2. When circulating bottoms-up after a drilling break

3. During cementing operations (including abandonment)

4. During logging operations

5. When circulating to condition drilling fluid


DEMO


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-K Copy of NOC from GPCB


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-L Reports of AAQ Monitoring


DEMO


DEMO

kinjisha

Text Box

Annexure-M Six Monthly Compliance Report


DEMO

Annexure 13

HSE Policy


DEMO


DEMO

Annexure 14

Minutes of Meeting of Public hearing


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO

Annexure 15

NABET accreditation


DEMO

^-.

l t- scrlieln€ foi Adc.editetioa ofFraf,onsrltant on€arizadons

Scope of Accreditation

NAME OF THE CONSULTANT ORGANIZATTON; D€tox Corporation An. timited3'" Floor, KG Chambers,Opp. Gujrafs-amachar Press,Udhna Darwaja,

SectorNg

124819

31

*Secfors ollocated to

Annexure I

SLNo.

L.2.3.4.5.

6.

CatesorvNE

7. 32

8. 339. 36

B ,AAAA

iA

AB

11.

r u&KKYc,E.o.

Detox Corporation h. Ltd., Surat PaEe 2 of 73


DEMO

Annexure 16

TOR Copy


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO


DEMO

Final Environmental Impact Assessment Impact Assessment

Report

Surface Production System (EPS)For

Production of Crude oil and Associated Gas

AtEPS M1-Survey no. 832,833, 835, 836 & 838

EPS M1A1 – Survey no – 827, 828, Village: Ambaliyara, Taluka: Dholka, Dist: Ahmedabad, Gujarat

Project Proponent

Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited

3rd Floor, K. G. Chambers,

Prepared By:

Opp. Gujarat Samachar Press, Udhna Darwaja, Ring Road,

Surat - 395 002.

NABET Accreditation vide letter no. NABET/EIA/RA002/034 dated 12/12/2013


DEMO

-{,-r5

EIA COORDINATOR

Name 4

Signatu re

Date

Period of Involvement

Contact information

Dec|arationbyExpertscontributingtotheEtAf6rGsPcL|M|TED

l, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the above EIA

Mr. PushPak Shah

31't october 2013

Frorn MaY 2013 to till date

9824412866

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERT

Name of theexpert/sPUSHPAK SHAH

lnvof:rement (Task**)

situ-uitffi"monitoring locations for ambient air,

impact identification with respect to

process on air environment and

suggesting mitigation measures,

formulating environment

management Plan, suggesting

monitoring Plan Post EC

lnvolvement{Period)

Signature &DateSr.

no.Functionalarea

From MaY 2013

to till date

7rula* I

L. AP

From lJlaY 2013

to till date /

' 1Pl't"t3

2. WP PUSHPAK SHAI-I Site visit, tinaliztng basetlne

monitoring locations for ground

water & Surface water, imPact

identification for water environment,

formulating environment

management Plan, suggesting

and hazardous waste generation

from process, suggesting disPosal

Plan

From MaY 2013

to till date /'z&n'&-7r-l&*

3 SHW PUSHPAK SHAH

From MaY 201-3

to till date J4 SE DT. DILIP SHAH Site Visit/ Field Survey, Assessment or

the oossible changes to socio-

economic issues arisinC o9l gllftg

I


DEMO

/

/

--lvnoiP

proposed project activity

5. EB Dr. MANOJ

ELEDATH

Site Visit, identification of fauna and

flora vide ground truthing, validationof primary data through secondarY

data, impact identification due toproject activity on existing flora and

fauna, suggesting Sreen beltdevelopment plan

From May 2013

to till date ,{rtncneoHmr: ,.YrrH

6. HG NILKANTH

KELAVANEKAR

Site Visit, Study geologY of area bY

using available secondarY data,

collection of ground water samples

from the existing bore wells and

analysis of same for study of ground

water quality in area. Analysis theground water level in the area bY

using hydrographs from secondary

data

From May 2013

to till date

1 GS

8. AQ ANKITA

BHAIRAVIYA

HITENDRA KELA

Site visit, deciding predominant winddirection in the area bY using Past

meteorology data, identifYing theambient air monitoring location in

coordination with AP, validating thestack height rvith standards and

conducting air modeling using ISC ST3

From May 2013

to till date

9. NV PUSHPAK SHAH Site visit, identifying locations forbaseline noise monitoring, study theprocess and identify the various

sources from where Possible noise

emission can occur, predicting impactdue to various sources of noise bY

noise modeling software, suggesting

mitigation measures and forrnulatingenvironment management Plan

From May 2013

to till dateb_ Nh^4

ffiry

1_0. LU IESSICA KARIA Development of landuse maPs ofstudy area using GIS / related

tools, site visit for ground truthsurvey- finalization of landuse

maps, contribution to EIA

docurnentation

From May 2013

to till dateArrnct't go

lleXroSr"t

.J.L.RH MITESH DESAI

ANKITA

BHAIRAVIYA

Study the process, identifu the risk

and hazards due to project activity,Developing & interPretingconsequence contours, suggesting

mitigation measures

From May 2013

to till date

n


DEMO

ADDITIONAL PERSONNEL

Declaration by the Head of the Accredited Consultant Organization

l, CHETAN CONTRACTOR, hereby confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the GSPC

LIMITED, EIA report.

Signature

Name

Designation MANAGING DIRECTOR

M/s DETOX CORPORATION PRIVATE LIMITED

Lette r no. NA B ETIE I A/RA002/034 dated 12 / L2 / 2OI3

Name of the EIA Consultant Organization

NABET Certificate No. & lssue Date

Sr.

no.Functionalarea

Name of theexpert/s

lnvolvement (Task**) lnvolvement(Period)

Signature &Date

t. AP, WP and

SHW

Ankita Bhairaviya Worked as part of team with EIA

coordinator for compilation ofre po rt

Team member with FAE for AP, WP

and SHW

From May 2013

to till date

2. AFAE-AQ, WP,

SHW

Maitri Contractor Team member with FAE for AQ,

WP, SHW

From May 2013

to till date qel3. AFAE- AQ" EB,

RH

Kinjisha Patel Team member with FAE for AQ" EB,

RH

From May 2013

to till date

4 AFAE _ AP

EB, WP

Nandan Kumar Team member with FAE for AP

Team member with FAE for EB, WP

From May 2013

to till date

5. WP, AP, NV SaurabhPacheriwala

Team member with FAE for WP,

AP, NV

From August2013 to tilldate


DEMO

F-7, Devkinandan ComPlex,Opp. Priyadarshini SocietY,Makarpura Road,Vadodara - 390010t 91-265-6540592

Environment & RS-GIS GonsultantProPrietor:

Dr. Jessica P. KariaM.Sc., Ph. D.

Email : director@envirogis. inWebsite: www. envirogis. i n

Date : 24th August,2014

The Managing DirectorDetox Corporation Pvt. Ltd.3rd Floor, K. G. Chambers,Udhna Dar,iraja, Ring Road,Surat 395 002

Kind Attn.: EIA Coordinator - Pushpak Shah

ENVIRO.GIS SER,V|CES

My association with Detox Corporation Pvt. Ltd. as a FunctionalArea Expert in the field of Land Use (LU)

EtA report for M/s. GSPC Limited, EPS M1 and EPS # MlAlLocated at Ambaliyara, Taluka: Dholka

Dear Sir,

This is to certify that t, JESSICA KARIA was a part of the EIA team that carried out

the EIA study. My expertise as a Land use (LU) expert was provided for the same.

My association may please be stated in the EIA report of M/s. GSPC Limited' EPS

M{ and EPS # MlA{ located at Ambaliyafa, Taluka: Dholka.

Thanking you.

Yours truly,

For Enviro GIS Services

Sub.

Ref.


DEMO

Ph*:re:{STg}-2$S}"?613M*bitt:$98}41}?132'S9$?9E94'3"34Ir*a{l;k*tl*s $t43SY*tu**'**"rt:

Re f'No; fi\k{:$l gS iZi}lr

Ilei:*xCorPurati Pvt-LID,3'dFloor. K'G' chantbers,

Udhnal) a,

ltring ru*ci, iir"trnt

Kind Attn.: i:IA C*r*rdin;rtnr - Pushpek $fuah

Su'b,

ile{'.

1,!v ass**lnti*n with llet$s crirp*r*tir:n ilvt. l-t''1. as * Iir-lnr:tiolt'al Artu

11 *rt.i;r thE fi*l<{ r:f }{vd:<>ge*logy{HG)

q)$te: 1," Clt:tobn 2{13

$c.rr 5ir,

Lin:ritee"i, ilyS h.t1 .rncl iJIl$ # h'{1A"1 troeatec{;rt Arnbali,vil:a'"f;rI*}qa: Dhnlka

'1'hatrkiltg t'c,ru

trd.fL;\\rAi\{iY(AI{}


DEMO

ANANTHSREE ECO - CARETERRESTRIAL & AQUATIC BIODIVERSITY RESEARCH CENTRE

office '# 8-9, Third floor, Meghna complex, Besides Bharat petroleum pump,Near Bhatar Ghar Rasta, Udhna - Magdalla Road, surat - 995012, Gujarat, India.

fi' (0261 ) 223231 1, E-Mait-ananthshree@hotmai t.com

Arcfoam{Fffi,/01/m13

Detox Corporatiofr PvtLTD3'd Floor,K.G. chambers,Udhna Darwaj+Ringroad, Surat

Kind Attn. : EIA Coordinator Pushpak Shah

2FlDeren6ct, m13

Dear Sir,

Sub.

Ref.

:

: My association with Detox Corporation pvr.LTD. as a Functionar AreaExpert in the field of Ecology & Biodiversity (EB)

: ErA report for \zr/s. GSPC Limited, Eps Ml AND Eps # MlAl rocated atAmbaliyara, Taluka Dholka

This is to certify that I, Dr- Manoj Eledath was a part of the EIA tearn that carried out the EIAstudy and associated report as stated above. My expertise as an Ecology & Biodiversity (EB)expert was provided for the same. My association may please be stated in the EIA report of EIAreport for l\d/s. GSPC Limited, EPS Ml AND EPS # M]-AL Located at Ambaliyara , TalukaDholka

.Thanking you

9 "r *%Un "-5"-11",-6J1*,L$ULS"-11 "^,-Sn**^a,


DEMO

Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited 1

Contents

1 Executive Summary ................................................................................ 11

1.1 Salient Features Of Site ........................................................................... 12

1.2 Need Of Project ...................................................................................... 12

1.3 Cost Of Project ....................................................................................... 12

1.4 Land Area Break Up ................................................................................ 12

1.5 Green Belt Development .......................................................................... 13

1.6 Process Details ....................................................................................... 13

1.7 Fuel Consumption Details ......................................................................... 14

1.8 Environmental Parameters ....................................................................... 14

1.8.1 Air Environment ...................................................................................... 14

1.8.2 Water Environment ................................................................................. 16

1.8.3 Noise Environment .................................................................................. 19

1.8.4 Land Environment ................................................................................... 20

1.8.5 Solid Waste Generation ............................................................................ 21

1.8.6 Hazardous Waste Generation .................................................................... 21

1.8.7 Socio Economic Environment .................................................................... 21

1.8.8 Risk Assessment ..................................................................................... 21

1.9 Environment Management System ............................................................ 22

1.10 Environment Monitoring Plan Post EC ......................................................... 22

2 Introduction ........................................................................................... 23

2.1 Project Proponent ................................................................................... 23

2.2 Product Profile ........................................................................................ 23

2.3 Project Background ................................................................................. 23

2.4 Salient Features Of Site ........................................................................... 29

2.5 Need Of The Project ................................................................................ 30

2.6 Cost Of Project ....................................................................................... 30

2.7 Land Area Break Up ................................................................................ 30

2.8 Purpose Of Study .................................................................................... 31


DEMO


2.9 Applicable Legislation .............................................................................. 31

2.10 Definition Of EIA ..................................................................................... 31

2.10.1 Methodology .......................................................................................... 32

2.10.2 Scope Of Study ...................................................................................... 32

2.10.3 Structure Of EIA Report ........................................................................... 38

3 Process Description ................................................................................. 41

3.1 Product Details ....................................................................................... 41

3.2 Fuel Details ............................................................................................ 41

3.3 Process Description ................................................................................. 41

3.3.1 Two Stage Separator ............................................................................... 44

3.3.2 Storage Tank ......................................................................................... 44

3.3.3 Bath Heater ........................................................................................... 44

3.3.4 Flare ..................................................................................................... 44

3.3.5 Drain Pit For Waste Water ........................................................................ 44

3.3.6 Fire ..................................................................................................... 44

3.3.7 Hazardous Waste Storage ........................................................................ 45

3.4 Water .................................................................................................... 45

3.4.1 Water Consumption ................................................................................. 45

3.4.2 Waste Water Generation .......................................................................... 45

3.5 Electricity .............................................................................................. 46

3.6 Stacks ................................................................................................... 46

3.7 Solid Waste Generation ............................................................................ 46

3.8 Hazardous Waste .................................................................................... 47

4 Baseline Study ....................................................................................... 48

4.1 Meteorology Study .................................................................................. 48

4.2 Ambient Air Quality ................................................................................. 50

4.2.1 Study Period And Area ............................................................................. 50

4.2.2 Details Of Parameter Monitored And Analysis Method Adopted ....................... 50

4.2.3 Air Monitoring Locations ........................................................................... 51

4.2.4 Baseline Data ......................................................................................... 54


DEMO


4.3 Water Environment ................................................................................. 55

4.3.1 Hydrology Of Area................................................................................... 55

4.3.2 Baseline Study ....................................................................................... 57

4.3.3 Study Period And Sampling Frequency ....................................................... 57

4.3.4 Details Of Parameter Monitored And Analysis Method Adopted ....................... 57

4.3.5 Water Sampling Locations ........................................................................ 58

4.3.6 Ground Water Quality .............................................................................. 60

4.3.7 Surface Water Quality.............................................................................. 62

4.4 Soil Environment .................................................................................... 64

4.5 Noise Environment .................................................................................. 67

4.6 Land Use Study ...................................................................................... 68

4.6.1 Primary Data Collection ........................................................................... 68

4.6.2 Secondary Data Collection ........................................................................ 68

4.6.3 Area Statistics Of Land Use/ Cover Classes ................................................. 68

4.7 Bio Ecology Study ................................................................................... 70

4.7.1 Floral Diversity Of Study Area ................................................................... 71

4.7.2 Faunal Biodiversity Of Study Area ............................................................. 73

4.8 Socio Economic Data ............................................................................... 75

5 Impact Identification ............................................................................... 78

5.1 Air Environment ...................................................................................... 78

5.2 Water Environment ................................................................................. 84

5.3 Solid Waste Generation ............................................................................ 84

5.4 Hazardous Waste Generation .................................................................... 84

5.5 Socio Economic Environment .................................................................... 84

5.6 Summary Of Impacts Identified And Its Mitigation Measures ......................... 85

6 Environment Management Plan ................................................................. 93

6.1 Administrative Aspects Of EMP .................................................................. 93

6.2 Environment Mangement Plan................................................................... 93

6.2.1 Ambient Air ............................................................................................ 93

6.2.2 Noise .................................................................................................... 98


DEMO


6.2.3 Water .................................................................................................... 99

6.2.4 Waste Water ........................................................................................ 100

6.2.5 Solid Waste .......................................................................................... 101

6.2.6 Hazardous Waste .................................................................................. 101

6.3 Environment Management Cell ................................................................ 102

6.4 Budgetary Allocation For Environment Management Plan ............................ 105

7 Environment Monitoring Plan .................................................................. 106

7.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring ............................................................... 106

7.2 Stack Monitoring ................................................................................... 106

7.3 Noise Environment ................................................................................ 106

7.4 Water And Waste Water Quality Monitoring .............................................. 107

7.4.1 Environment Laboratory ........................................................................ 107

7.5 Post Project Environment Monitoring Budgetary Allocation .......................... 107

8 Project Benefits .................................................................................... 108

8.1 Employment Potential ............................................................................ 109

9 Consultant Details ................................................................................. 110

List of Tables

Table 1: Location of EPS ..................................................................................... 11

Table 2: Product Profile ....................................................................................... 11

Table 3: Salient features of site ........................................................................... 12

Table 4: Green belt development plan ................................................................... 13

Table 5: Fuel consumption details ........................................................................ 14

Table 6: Average values for air pollutants in study area of EPS#M 1 & M 1A1 ............. 14

Table 7: Stack Details ......................................................................................... 15

Table 8: Resultant Concentration due to incremental increase for DG set stack for

EPS#M1 & M1 A1 ............................................................................................... 16

Table 9: Water monitoring location and major parameters for study are of EPS#M1 & M1

A1 ................................................................................................................... 17


DEMO


Table 10: Water Consumption .............................................................................. 18

Table 11: Waste Water Generation ....................................................................... 19

Table 12: Noise levels in study area ...................................................................... 19

Table 13: Land use/cover Classes Area Statistics for study area of EPS# M1 & M1A1 ... 20

Table 14: Solid Waste Generation ......................................................................... 21

Table 15: Hazardous Waste ................................................................................. 21

Table 16: Product Profile ..................................................................................... 23

Table 17: Salient Features of Site ......................................................................... 29

Table 18: Land area break up .............................................................................. 30

Table 19: Green belt development plan ................................................................. 30

Table 20: TOR Compliance .................................................................................. 32

Table 22: Detail of fuel consumption ..................................................................... 41

Table 23: Water Consumption .............................................................................. 45

Table 24: Waste Water Generation ....................................................................... 45

Table 25: Electricity ........................................................................................... 46

Table 26: DG Sets .............................................................................................. 46

Table 27: Stack Details ....................................................................................... 46

Table 28: Solid Waste Generation ......................................................................... 46

Table 29: Hazardous Waste ................................................................................. 47

Table 30: Meteorology Data ................................................................................. 48

Table 31: Analysis methods ................................................................................. 51

Table 32: Air Monitoring Locations ........................................................................ 53

Table 33: Concentration of Various Pollutants ........................................................ 54

Table 34: Analysis method for water parameters .................................................... 57

Table 35: Water Monitoring Locations ................................................................... 59

Table 36: Ground Water Quality ........................................................................... 60

Table 37: Surface Water Quality ........................................................................... 62

Table 38: Use based classification of surface water in India ...................................... 63

Table 40: Soil monitoring location and Soil Quality .................................................. 66


DEMO


Table 41: Noise Monitoring Location ..................................................................... 67

Table 42: Noise quality in study area .................................................................... 67

Table 43: Details of Satellite Data ........................................................................ 68

Table 44: Land use/cover Classes Area Statistics within 10 km Radius of Project Site .. 68

Table 45: Distance of Salt affected area ................................................................ 69

Table 46: Near Threatened Birds of Study Area ...................................................... 73

Table 47: Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act 1972 ................. 75

Table 48: Demographic structure of the project area ............................................... 76

Table 49: Economic Structure of Village Economy ................................................... 76

Table 50: Stack Details ....................................................................................... 79

Table 51: Resultant Concentration due to incremental increase for DG set stack ......... 80

Table 52: Impact Identification and mitigation measures ......................................... 86

Table 53: Species for Green Belt Development ....................................................... 96

Table 54: Expected Recharge Rate ....................................................................... 99

Table 55: Estimation on Availability of Yearly Runoff (M 1 Site) ................................ 99

Table 56: Estimation on Availability of Yearly Runoff (M1 A 1 Site) .......................... 100

Table 57: Hazardous waste generation ................................................................ 101

Table 58: Estimated cost of implementation of EMP for each site ............................ 105

Table 59: Monitoring schedule ........................................................................... 107

Table 60: Employment generation at each site ..................................................... 109

List of figures

Figure 1: Process flow diagram ............................................................................ 13

Figure 2: Site map showing the block CB-ONN-2002/3 ............................................ 25

Figure 3: Site map showing the sites considered for proposed EPS facility (EPS#M1 &

M1A1) .............................................................................................................. 26

Figure 4: Site Map for 10 Km radius from project site (M1 and M1A1) ....................... 27

Figure 5: Satellite Map of Project Site with distance between two sites (M-1 and M 1 A-1)

....................................................................................................................... 28


DEMO


Figure 6: Diagram of Sucker Rod Pump ................................................................. 42

Figure 7: Flow Diagram of Production System ........................................................ 43

Figure 8: Wind Rose Diagram .............................................................................. 49

Figure 9: Wind Class & Stability Class Frequency Distribution ................................... 50

Figure 10: Air Monitoring Locations on site map of study area .................................. 52

Figure 11: Hydrograph of Village: Chaloda, Taluka: Dholka, District: Ahmedabad ........ 56

Figure 12: Land use/ Land cover – M 1 & M1 A 1 for 10 Km radius from project site .... 70

Figure 13: Google Map showing the area where near threatened birds were spotted

during field study ............................................................................................... 74

Figure 14: Isopleths for PM ................................................................................. 81

Figure 15: Isopleths for SOx ................................................................................ 82

Figure 16: Isopleths for NOx ................................................................................ 83

Figure 17: Typical layout diagram of wastewater storage pit .................................. 101

Figure 18: Design of storage room ..................................................................... 102

Figure 19: Organization Chart with Environment Management Cell at corporate level of

GSPC Limited .................................................................................................. 103

Figure 20: Organization chart at project site ........................................................ 104

List of annexure

Annexure 1: Layout Map

Annexure 2: Photograph of EPS facility

Annexure 3: Photograph of baseline study & Public hearing

Annexure 4: Geohydrology report

Annexure 5: Bio ecology report

Annexure 6: Land use report

Annexure 7: Socio economic Report

Annexure 8: Risk assessment and Disaster Management plan

Annexure 9: Applicable Legislation

Annexure 10: Ambient Air Quality Report

Annexure 11: Ground and Surface Water Quality Report


DEMO


Annexure 12: EC Compliance Report

Annexure 13: HSE Policy

Annexure 14: Minutes of Meeting of Public Hearing

Annexure 15: NABET Accreditation

Annexure 16: TOR Copy


DEMO


ABBREVIATIONS

AAQ : Ambient Air Quality

AAQMS : Ambient Air Quality Management System

APHA : American Public Health Association

AWWA : American Water Works Association

BOD : Biological Oxygen Demand

BTX : Benzene Toulene Xylene

CETP : Central Effluent Treatment Plant

CGWA : Central Ground Water Authority

COD : Chemical Oxygen Demand

CPCB : Central Pollution Control Board

CREP : Corporate Responsibility for Environment Protection

CSR : Corporate Social Responsibility

DG set : Diesel Generator set

DGMS : Directorate General of Mines Safety

EIA : Environment Impact Assessment

EMP : Environment Management Plan

EPS : Early Production System/ Surface Production Facility

ETP : Effluent Treatment Plant

GLC : Ground Level Concentration

GSPC : Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited

GWRDC : Gujarat Water Resources Development Corporation

HC : Hydrocarbon

HSD : High Speed Diesel

IOCL : Indian Oil Corporation Limited

IS : Indian Standards

ISC-ST : Industrial Source Complex – Short Term 3

LFT : Liver Function Test

MOC : Material Of Construction

MoEF : Ministry of Environment Forest

MPN : Most Probable Number

MSIHC : Manufacture, Storage, Import of Hazardous Chemical

Rules

NAAQS : National Ambient Air Quality Standards

NABET : National Accreditation Board for Education and Training

NABL : National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration

Laboratories


DEMO


NEERI : National Environmental Engineering & Research

Institute

NH : National Highway

NOx : Nitrogen Oxide

NRRP : National Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy

OISD : Oil Industry Safety Directorate

ONGC-CTF : Oil and Natural Gas Corporation

PCC : Plain Cement Concrete

PM : Particulate Matter

RO : Regional Office

SOx : Sulphur Dioxide

TDS : Total Dissolved Solids

TLV : Threshold Limiting Value

TOR : Terms of Reference

TSDF : Treatment, Storage, Disposal Facility

TSS : Total Suspended Solids

UGVCL : Uttar Gujarat Vij Company Limited

VOC : Volatile Organic Carbon

WPCF : Water Pollution Control Federation


DEMO


Chapter 1 Executive Summary

1 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Project Details

Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited (GSPC) had been established in year 1979

as a Government of Gujarat undertaking and is involved in exploration and production of

Oil and Gas.

The Drilling of these wells in the block was carried out in year 2008. Oil was discovered

in these wells. All the requisite facilities shall be put up in place at site as per rules and

regulations of DGMS and the production shall be commenced once the approval from

concerned authority is received. Up gradation of facility may be required in future if

there are changes in well fluid characteristics and addition of new development wells.

Now, GSPC proposes to start the production of oil and gas at the said locations by

establishing EPS. Location of the EPS is shown in Table 1.

Table 1: Location of EPS

EPS Survey nos. Village Taluka District

M 1 832, 833, 835, 836,

838

Ambaliyara Dholka Ahmedabad

M 1 A 1 827, 828

The production profile at respective wells is as mentioned in Table 2


Proposed wells

Products

M-1 M 1 A-1

Crude oil 2-4 m3/day 2-4 m3/day

Associate Gas 100-150 m3/day 120-200 m3/day

The location of the wells is approximately 0.40 Km away from each other. Hence single

report is prepared for both the wells considering study area of 5 Km radius from both the

wells respectively.


DEMO


1.1 SALIENT FEATURES OF SITE

The salient features of site are as noted in Table 3

Table 3: Salient features of site

EPS well M 1 M 1 A1

Latitude of project site

Longitude of project site

22°45’38.30”N

72º30’35.20” E

22°45’27.78”N

72º30’44.34” E

Nearest road connectivity NH 8 : ∼ 8 Km and NH 8A:~13 km

Nearest rail connectivity Ahmedabad station

Approx 30 Km

Ahmedabad station

Approx 31 Km

Nearest habitation Approx 1.30 Km Approx 1.68 Km

Nearest Lake/ pond/ reservoir/ canal Lake: approx 0.70 Km Lake: approx 0.74

Km

Nearest city Ahmedabad Ahmedabad

Source of water Tanker water/ Ground

water

Tanker water/

Ground water

Source of electricity State Electricity Board

Any Protected areas notified under Wild

Life (Protection) Act, 1972, Notified Eco

sensitive area, Interstate boundary in 5

Km radius



1.2 NEED OF PROJECT

The proposed project is aimed at increasing the production in order to fill the gap

between national crude oil demand and supply. Also it will help in meeting the energy

requirements of the nation and generate employment opportunities.

1.3 COST OF PROJECT

Capital expenditures for development of Surface Production Facility at one location is

estimated around ~1.3 crores.

1.4 LAND AREA BREAK UP

The total land area acquired for M1 is 19418.3 sq m, and for M1A1 is 22585 sq m.


DEMO


1.5 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

Green belt development shall be done in phase wise manner wherein initially 10 % green

belt shall be developed and in later stage of project the same shall be expanded.


EPS Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

M 1 1941.83 sq m 1941.83 sq m 2524.73 sq m

M 1 A 1 2258.5 sq m 2258.5 sq m 2936.05 sq m

1.6 PROCESS DETAILS

Figure 1: Process flow diagram

Well Head

EPS Header

Two Phase separator

Associated Natural Gas

Liquid crude oil & Water

Flaring Used in Bath Heater

Storage Tank

Loading point

Effluent water drain pit

Transported to

IOCL/ ONGC

Crude oil Water

Crude oil

Crude oil

Natural Hydrocarbon

Natural Hydrocarbon


DEMO


1.7 FUEL CONSUMPTION DETAILS

Fuel used will be mainly in form of diesel for operation of stand by DG sets. The details

of diesel consumption are as mentioned in Table 5

Table 5: Fuel consumption details

EPS Fuel used Quantity

M 1 Diesel 4 liter/hour

M 1 A1 Diesel 4 liter/hour

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

Existing environmental parameters were studied for one month i.e. 15th May 2013 to 15th

June 2013.

1.8.1 Air Environment

The existing air quality was measured at 6 locations within 5 Km radius of the project

sites. (i.e. 5 km surrounding well site M-1, M-1A1).The prominent wind direction at the

site was observed as West to East during the study period.

1.8.1.1 Air Environment at EPS#M 1 A 1 and M 1

Two locations were selected in downwind direction where as two location were selected

in the up wind direction from the site. The detail of the monitoring location with average

concentration of each pollutant at these locations is given in table below

Table 6: Average values for air pollutants in study area of EPS#M 1 & M 1A1

Sampling

Station

Code Direction w. r. t

project site

PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx VOC as

BTX

HC

M 1 A1 M 1

Unit µg/m3 ppm

Ambaliyara AQ 1 NW NW 86 45 6.94 9.97 ND ND

Ambaliyara -

Dariyapura

AQ 2 E NEE 89 49 6.79 10.57 ND ND

Rajpur AQ 3 SWW W 84 23 8.41 11.95 ND ND

Sathal AQ 4 S S 94 34 9.28 13.21 ND ND

Kaloli AQ 5 SE SE 92 31 6.31 9.84 ND ND

Chitrasad AQ 6 NEE NEE 83 34 5.66 8.26 ND ND


DEMO


1.8.1.2 Impact study

There will be an increase in SPM level along with Sox (from vehicle exhausts) due to

transportation of construction material at the sites. During the construction activity the

major impact on the air environment will be due to increase in the fugitive emissions.

During operation phase the major air pollution creating source will be the stack attached

to the DG set and separator (flare stack). The details of the stacks are as given in the

Table 7.

Table 7: Stack Details

Site

Particulars

M 1 M 1 A 1

Stack attached to DG Set DG Set

Capacity of DG set 63.5 KVA 63.5 KVA

Stack height 5 m 5 m

Stack Diameter 0.101 m 0.101 m

Exit Gas Velocity 9.95 m/s 9.95 m/s

Exit Gas temperature 181 °C 181 °C

Emission in g/s PM: 0.0121 g/s

SOx: 0.02 g/s

NOx: 0.091 g/s

PM: 0.0121 g/s

SOx: 0.02 g/s

NOx: 0.091 g/s

Flaring (Technical Flaring) will be temporary activity wherein the gas produced will be

burnt. Hydrocarbon in major portion with traces of NOx will be burnt

Air quality modelling was done in order to evaluate PM, SOx and NOx incremental

concentrations due to proposed project. These results are based on considering the main

stacks. The above data were used as input data for the modelling purpose.

The incremental increase in the concentration of pollutants is given in the Table 8 with

superimposing the same on the existing baseline data


DEMO


Table 8: Resultant Concentration due to incremental increase for DG set stack for EPS#M1 & M1 A1

Pollutant Incremental

Concentration

μg/m3

Baseline

Concentration

μg/m3 *

Resultant

Concentration

μg/m3

Direction

w.r.t.

stack

location

Distance

w.r.t.

stack

location

PM 0.277 89 89.277 East 0.5 km

SO2 0.459 6.79 7.249 East 0.5 km

NOx 2.089 10.57 12.659 East 0.5 km

The resultant concentration was observed below the National Ambient air quality

standards published by CPCB

1.8.1.3 Mitigation measures

Point source emission

Stack height shall be based as per the statutory requirement of CPCB. The stack height

for DG sets are based on the below formula:-

H = h + 0.2 √KVA

Where H = height of stack; h = height of building/ Base of installation

Stack height for oil and gas separators were decided based on the OMR (1984

guidelines)

Installation of proper stack height will lead to proper dispersion of pollutants

VOC emissions

VOC emitted during the production will be burnt in flaring with associated gases. In order

to limit the emission of VOC, the handling operation shall be carried out in closed

system.

Fugitive emissions

Adequate green belt shall be developed within and outside the premises to abate air and

noise pollution.

1.8.2 Water Environment

1.8.2.1 Baseline Study for EPS#M1 and M1 A1

The existing water environment in the study area is rich in both ground and surface

water. Total 6 nos. of ground water samples and 5 nos. of surface water samples were


DEMO


collected to study the baseline water condition in and around the vicinity of the project

site.

Major parameters at the monitoring site are given in Table 9.

Table 9: Water monitoring location and major parameters for study are of

EPS#M1 & M1 A1

Village Ground water Source Parameters monitored

Project Site

M1A1

Bore well Electrical Conductivity, pH, Nitrite (NO2),

Nitrate (NO3), Phosphate, Potassium,

Calcium, Magnesium, Carbonate,

Bicarbonate, Chlorides, Sulphate, COD,

Silica (SiO2), Fluoride, Boron, TDS

Project Site M 1 Bore well

Ambaliyara Bore well

Ambaliyara -

Dariyapura

Bore well

Rajpur Bore well

Sathal Bore well

Village Surface water Source

Ambaliyara Pond Electrical Conductivity, pH, DO, TDS,

Nitrite (NO2), Nitrate (NO3), Phosphate,

Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium, Sodium,

Carbonate, Bicarbonate, Chloride,

Sulphate, TON, Sodium Adsorption ratio,

Boron, Total coliforms, COD, BOD5days

Dariyapura River

Rajpur Pond

Naika Pond

Sathal Pond

Ground water

Water Quality of bore well at Dariyapura exceeded the permissible limits for TDS

calcium, hardness, alkalinity, chloride and sulphate. Fluoride was found within the

desirable limits at all the studied locations. TDS level was higher than the desirable limit

at all the sampling locations. The water quality at all the location was found to be saline

in nature. None of the studied well locations for ground water were fit for drinking

purpose.

The main source of drinking water for sampling locations is Narmada canal supply. Water

from bore well was mainly used for the purpose other than drinking.


DEMO


Surface water

The surface water at Ambaliyara falls under Class B category of water as per CPCB

standards. The water was used mainly for cattle washing and drinking purpose.

Surface water of others locations were used for washing of clothes and cattles. No other

activities were carried out at these locations.

1.8.2.2 Source of water

Water will be sourced from Ground water or through water tankers. As per the CGWA

notification, 2009; permission for withdrawal of water is not envisage.

1.8.2.3 Water Consumption

The total water consumption for the proposed project is as per Table 10

Table 10: Water Consumption

M 1 M 1 A 1





No water shall be required for any process activities in the proposed project. Apart from

domestic usage, water will be required as fire water make up. Total 2 KL water shall be

required as fire water.

1.8.2.4 Waste Water generation

Waste water generation will be from domestic usage only. Apart from this, there will be

waste water generation in form of produced water during extraction of oil and gas in the

later stage. As with aging of field, reservoir water starts moving into well bore and will

be produced along with crude oil. This is mainly due to increase of water saturation in

Hydrocarbon pore volume. The same shall be separated in the oil and gas separator and

due to density difference, it will be drained out. The same shall be collected in the drain

pit.


DEMO



M1 M 1 A1




Environment Management Plan – Water

Ground water recharging will be done by implementation of rain water harvesting

Waste Water generated will mainly be in form of produced water. The same shall be

collected in the waste water pit, It shall be further analyzed by MoEF recognized

laboratories and later sent to authorized CETP for final disposal. Domestic waste water

shall be sent to septic tank/ soak pit

1.8.3 Noise Environment

1.8.3.1 Baseline data

The noise level varies depending on the type of activities carried out in the surrounding

area. The baseline noise environment was studied at the project sites as well as the

surrounding villages and the data are as mentioned in Table 12

Table 12: Noise levels in study area

Area

code

Equivalent Noise Level L(eq) in dB(A) CPCB Limits

Day Times Night Time Day time Night time

NQ 1 40.5 37.6 55 45

NQ 2 48.3 40.3 55 45

NQ 3 46.5 39.3 55 45

NQ 4 50.2 43.2 55 45

NQ 5 42.9 38.9 55 45

NQ 6 39.9 36.4 55 45

1.8.3.2 Impact study

During the construction phase the minor noise generation will be from the mechanical

equipment installed at site for the construction work and due to vehicular movement.


DEMO


During operation phase (during oil production activity) there will be practically no noise

generation. Minor noise generation will occur due to transportation activity at site and

during occasional operation of DG sets.

1.8.3.3 Mitigation measures

DG sets shall be placed in enclosed area equipped with silencers.

Green belt shall be developed to attenuate noise and the extent of green belt shall be as

per CPCB guidelines.

Regular noise monitoring on weekly basis will be carried out at the noise generating

sources and at entry - exit gates of the plant.

GSPC PPE Policy shall be implemented

1.8.4 Land Environment

The land use of the study area surrounding 5 Km from the proposed project sites are

given in Table 13

Table 13: Land use/cover Classes Area Statistics for study area of EPS# M1 & M1A1

Class Area (Ha.) Area (sq. km.) Area (%)

Agriculture 24672.18 246.72 78.57

Scrub 1415.91 14.16 4.51

Open Vegetation 1871.34 18.71 5.96

Close Vegetation 22.00 0.22 0.07

Habitation 1058.59 10.59 3.37

Industrial Area 620.00 6.20 1.97

Water Body 342.38 3.42 1.09

River 431.00 4.30 1.37

Salt Affected Land 15.29 0.15 0.05

Barren Land 87.67 0.88 0.28

Sandy Area 237.50 2.37 0.76

Aquatic Vegetation 65.05 0.65 0.21

Plantation 561.88 5.62 1.79

Total 31400.79 313.99 100 %


DEMO


1.8.5 Solid Waste Generation

The solid waste generated from the proposed project will be only in form of domestic

municipal waste.

Table 14: Solid Waste Generation

M 1 M 1 A1

Domestic waste 2 kg/day 2 kg/day

The waste generated will be disposed through local door to door collection facility from

municipality

1.8.6 Hazardous Waste Generation

Hazardous waste generated from both the site is as given in Table 15

Table 15: Hazardous Waste

M 1 M 1 A1

Used oil 15 liters/year 15 liters/year

Oily Cotton Waste 10 kg/month 10 kg/month

Oily sludge 4 scm/year 4 scm/year

Used oil due to negligible quantity shall be used for internal purpose for greasing

whereas oily cotton waste will be send to approved TSDF site. Oily sludge generated will

be send to registered recyclers.

1.8.7 Socio economic environment

There shall be positive impact on the socio economic environment of the area. Increase

in direct/ indirect job opportunity shall take place. Services in the locality shall be used

and accordingly growth in economic structure of the area will take place.

1.8.8 Risk assessment

Detail consequence analysis was done considering different scenarios. The following

likely maximum credible scenarios (Primary) were considered for hazard analysis.

• Catastrophic failure of crude oil storage tank

• Catastrophic failure / leakage of separator leads to free spread pool fire.

• Full bore failure of pipe from well to separator lead to pool / jet fire.

• Entire inventory leaked out from road tanker / leakage in road tanker lead to free

spread pool fire


DEMO


From the results it can be observed that damage distances from all scenarios except

Road Tanker Inventory leaked out (pool fire) will be restricted to the boundary of plant

premise. The effect of damage will be minimal outside the plant premises. The effect of

radiation outside premises will be 1.6 KV/m2 and in some case 4 KW/m2 which will have

negligible impact on human beings.

1.9 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A full fledged environment management cell shall be developed at the proposed site with

necessary infrastructure.

1.10 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PLAN POST EC

The main attributes for which monitoring shall be carried out are as below:

1. Ambient air Quality

2. Stack Emission

3. Wastewater Quality

4. Noise Level

5. Hazardous Waste


DEMO


Chapter 2 Introduction

2 INTRODUCTION

2.1 PROJECT PROPONENT

Gujarat State Petroleum Corporation Limited (GSPC) has been established in year 1979

as a Government of Gujarat undertaking and is involved in exploration and production of

Oil and Gas.

GSPC has grown from being an operator of small fields in Gujarat into an expansive oil

and gas exploration and production company across India. Its rise in the hydrocarbon

sector was helped by the Central Government’s opening of the sector to private

participation in the early 1990s. GSPC constructed India’s first and only Land Based

Drilling Platform in the Hazira gas field in 1998, through which gas is being supplied to

various industries across Gujarat.

In the last few years GSPC has played a pioneering role in the development of the

Nation’s hydrocarbon resources, most notably, with its discoveries in the Krishna-

Godavari Basin (Offshore).

2.2 PRODUCT PROFILE

GSPC Limited now proposes to establish two EPS at Village: Ambaliyara, Taluka: Dholka,

District Ahmedabad


Proposed wells

Products

M-1 M 1 A-1



2.3 PROJECT BACKGROUND

The proposed wells i.e. EPS#M1 and M1A1 fall under the drilling block CB-ONN-2002/3

under NELP IV Sanand Miroli Block in Cambay Basin (Figure 2). Company has obtained

Environment Clearance for the drilling activity from MoEF vide letter no. F. No. J-

11011/1046/2007-IA-II (I) dated 07th February 2008. Accordingly GSPC Limited had

executed the drilling of 17 wells in block CB-ONN-2002/3 and based on the discovery of

oil, GSPC has decided to start production activity at the proposed well locations i.e. M-1

and M 1 A-1 (Figure 3) by establishing EPS. Other wells, apart from M-1 and M-1 A-1


DEMO


were restored and handed over to farmers. Depth of drilling for M-1 was 2479 meters

and that of M-1 A-1 was 2527 meters.

The Drilling of these wells in the block CB-ONN-2002/3 (Figure 2) was carried out in year

2008. Oil was discovered in these wells. All the requisite facilities shall be put up in place

at site as per rules and regulations of DGMS-OMR 1984 and the production shall be

commenced once the approval from concerned authority is received.

These wells are located at a distance of approximately 0.40 Km from each other. Hence

single report is prepared for both the wells considering study area of 5 Km radius from

both the wells respectively. The location of both the wells on satellite image is as shown

in the Figure 5. The site feature of the surrounding area of 10 Km radius from the

project site is as shown in Figure 4.


DEMO


Figure 2: Site map showing the block CB-ONN-2002/3

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Figure 3: Site map showing the sites considered for proposed EPS facility (EPS#M1 & M1A1)

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Figure 4: Site Map for 10 Km radius from project site (M1 and M1A1)

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Figure 5: Satellite Map of Project Site with distance between two sites (M-1 and M 1 A-1)

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


2.4 SALIENT FEATURES OF SITE

The salient features of site are as noted in Table 17

Table 17: Salient Features of Site

EPS well M 1 M 1 A1

Survey no. 832, 833, 835, 836 and 838

827, 828

Village

Taluka

District

State

Ambaliyara

Dholka

Ahmedabad

Gujarat

Type of land Land is taken on lease

Total land acquired 19418.3 sq.m 22585 sq.m

Latitude of project site

Longitude of project site

22°45’38.30”N

72º30’35.20” E

22°45’27.78”N

72º30’44.34” E

Nearest road connectivity NH 8 : ∼ 8 Km and NH 8A:~13 km

Nearest rail connectivity Ahmedabad station

Approx 30 Km

Ahmedabad station

Approx 31 Km

Nearest habitation Ambaliyara village

Approx 1.30 Km

Ambaliyara village

Approx 1.68 Km

Nearest Lake/ pond/ reservoir/ canal Lake: approx 0.70 Km Lake: approx 0.74 Km

Nearest city Ahmedabad Ahmedabad

Source of water Tanker water/ Ground

water

Tanker water/ Ground

water

Source of electricity State Electricity Board

Any Protected areas notified under Wild

Life (Protection) Act, 1972, Notified Eco

sensitive area, Interstate boundary in 5

Km radius




DEMO


The salient features of site with respect to environmental aspects are determined by

the following major considerations.

• There is no protected area notified under The Wildlife Protection Act-1972; and

no notified eco-sensitive area within 10-km radius.

• Approach road from site to village road is available

• Nearest village is Ambaliyara located at distance of 1.30 Km

2.5 NEED OF THE PROJECT

The proposed project is aimed at increasing the production towards filling the gap

between national crude oil demand and supply. Also it will help in meeting the energy

requirements of the nation and generate employment opportunities.

2.6 COST OF PROJECT

Capital expenditure for development of Surface Production Facility for each location is

estimated around ~1.3 Crores.

2.7 LAND AREA BREAK UP

The detailed land area break up for the proposed project site is as mentioned below:

Table 18: Land area break up

Purpose Land area for M 1 Land area for M 1 A1

Built up area 678 sq m 550 sq m

Open area 12331.91 sq m 14581.95 sq m

Green belt area 6408.39 sq m 7453.05 sq m

Total area 19418.3 sq m 22585 sq m

Green belt development shall be done in a phased manner wherein initially 10 % green

belt shall be developed and later on 2nd and 3rd phase shall be developed within four

years of project commissioning period..


EPS Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

M 1 1941.83 sq m 1941.83 sq m 2524.73 sq m

M 1 A 1 2258.5 sq m 2258.5 sq m 2936.05 sq m

The lay out map of both the site is attached as Annexure 1.


DEMO


2.8 PURPOSE OF STUDY

The proposed project is considered as category ‘A’ project in Sr. no. 1 (b) i.e. Offshore

and onshore oil and gas exploration, development & production, in the Government of

India Notification no. 1533 dated 14th September, 2006 and amendment thereof; which

requires prior Environmental Clearance before starting construction, production or any

other allied activities related to the project. For obtaining the Environmental Clearance;

it is required to carry out the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and prepare

EIA report as per the Terms of Reference issued by MoEF.

For the preparation of EIA study report, GSPC Limited retained M/s Detox Corporation

Private Limited. The accreditation letter of M/s Detox Corporation Private Limited is

attached as Annexure 15.

2.9 APPLICABLE LEGISLATION

The lists of applicable laws for the proposed EPS facilities are as follows:

• Environment Protection Act, 1986 and amendment thereof

• EIA Notification, 2006 and amendments thereof

• The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and amendment

thereof

• The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and amendment thereof

• Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary movement) Rules,

2008 and amendment thereof

• The Noise (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000

• Petroleum Act, 1934

• Oil Mines Regulation, 1984

The details description of applicable legislations are attached as Annexure 9

2.10 DEFINITION OF EIA

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a formal process used to predict how

industrial development or construction project will affect natural resources such as

water, air, land, socioeconomic and bio ecological environment.

An EIA usually involves a sequence of steps:

• Screening

• Scoping

• Public consultation

• Appraisal


DEMO


2.10.1 Methodology

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies include identification, assessment,

quantitative evaluation and prediction of probable impacts. To minimize the impact of

the project on various environmental attributes, mitigation measures are suggested for

implementation along with the project.

The methodology of this study can be schematized as detailed below:

• To gather information on present environmental conditions and relevant national

environmental guidelines and EIA procedures.

• Scoping

• Assessment of significant impacts.

• Description of residual impacts.

• Description of mitigating, all significant/ residual impacts

• Development of monitoring plans.

To inform all relevant and involved authorities through public hearing, regarding the

impact of the project on the environment and the proposed mitigation measures

2.10.2 Scope of Study

This report represents the environmental impact assessment and management plan of

the proposed project at Village: Ambaliyara, Taluka: Dholka, Dist.: Ahmedabad, State:

Gujarat.

As per the requirements stated in the Environmental Impact Assessment Notification

2006 and its subsequent amendments, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study

has been undertaken to assess the environmental impacts of the proposed project and to

develop a site specific environmental management plan and risk mitigation measures.

Subsequently, baseline environmental studies have been conducted during the summer

season (15th May 2013 to 15th June 2013) as per the TOR issued by MoEF.

The EIA report has been prepared as per the TOR issued by MoEF vide letter no. F. No.

J-11011/405/2012-IA II (I) dated 25th April 2013. The copy of terms of reference is

attached as Annexure 16. The detailed terms of reference and corresponding

compliances are mentioned below:

Table 20: TOR Compliance

Sr. No. TOR points Compliance

1. Executive Summary of the project Refer Chapter 1, page no. 11


DEMO


2. Photographs of the EPS facilities area Refer Annexure 2

3. A separate chapter on status of compliance

of environmental conditions granted by

state/ centre to be provided. As per circular

dated 30th May 2012 issued by MoEF, a

certified report by RO, MoEF on status of

compliance of conditions on existing unit to

be provided in EIA/ EMP report

Compliance on previous Environment

Clearance attached Refer Annexure

12.

Regional Office – MoEF Bhopal has

visited site inline to the certification of

compliance of existing Environment

Clearance on 29th Jan 2014. Certified

report shall be directly submitted to

MoEF.

4. Justification of the project Refer Chapter 2, Section 2.5, Page

no. 30

5. Promoters and their back ground Refer Chapter 2, Section 2.1, Page

no. 23

6. Regulatory framework Refer Chapter 2, Section 2.9, Page

no. 31 and Annexure 9

7. A map indicating location of the project and

distance from severely critically polluted

area

Refer Chapter 2, Figure 4, Page no.

27 and Section 2.4, Page no. 29

8. Project location and plant layout Refer Chapter 2, Figure 4, Page 27 for

project location and Annexure 1 for

plant layout

9. Current status of construction activities Refer Chapter 2, Section 2.3, Page 23

10. Infrastructure facilities including power

sources

Refer Chapter 3, Section 3.3, Page

no. 41 to 45 and Section 3.5, Page

no. 46

11. Total cost of the project along with total

capital cost and recurring cost/ annum for

environmental pollution control measures


no. 30 for cost of project and Chapter

6, Section 6.4, Page no. 105 for cost

on EMP

12. Project site location along with site map of

10 km area and site details providing various

industries, surface water bodies, forests etc

Refer Chapter 2, Figure 4, Page no.

27 and Chapter 4, Figure 12, Page no.

70


DEMO


13. Present land use based on satellite imagery

for the study area of 10 km radius


no. 68 for land use study and Figure

12, Page no. 70

14. Location of national park/ wild life

sanctuary/ reserve forest within 10 km

radius of the project


no. 29

15. Details of the total land area breakup of the

land use for green belt and other uses


no. 30

16. List of products along with the production

capacities


no. 41

17. Detailed list of raw material required and

source, mode of storage and transportation


no. 41

18. Manufacturing process details along with the

chemical reactions and process flow chart


no. 41

19. Site specific micro meteorological data using

temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind

speed and direction and rainfall is necessary


no. 48

20. Ambient air quality monitoring at 6 locations

within the study area of 5 km aerial

coverage from the project site as per NAAQS

notified on 16th September 2009. Location of

one AAQMS in downwind direction

Refer Chapter 4, Section 4.2.3, Page

no. 51

21. One season site specific micro

meteorological data using temperature,

relative humidity, hourly wind speed and

direction and rainfall and AAQ data (for one

month except monsoon) for PM10, SO2, NOx

including HC and VOCs should be collected.

The monitoring stations should take into

account the pre dominant wind direction,

population zone and sensitive receptors

including reserved forests.

Data for water and noise monitoring should

also be included


no. 50 to 54


no. 55 for water monitoring and

Section 4.5, Page no. 67 for noise


DEMO


environment

22. Air pollution control measures proposed for

the effective control of gaseous emissions

within permissible limits

Refer Chapter 6, Section 6.2.1.2,

Page no. 95

23. Design details of ETP, incinerator, if any

along with boiler, scrubbers/ bag filters etc

Waste water drain will be constructed

at site and the details of same is

discussed in Chapter 6, Section 6.2.4,

page no. 100

24. Details of water and air pollution and its

mitigation plan

Refer Chapter 5, Section 5.1 and 5.2,

Page no. 78 & 84

25. An action plan to control and monitor

secondary fugitive emissions from all the

sources


no. 93

26. Determination of atmospheric inversion level

at the project site and assessment of ground

level concentration of pollutants from the

stack emission based on site specific

meteorological features. Air quality modeling

for proposed plant


no. 78

27. Permission for drawl of water from

concerned authority. Water balance chart

including quantity of effluent generated

recycled and reused and discharged


no. 45

28. Action plan for ‘zero’ discharge of effluent

should be included. Treatment and disposal

of produced water


no. 84 and Chapter 6, section 6.2.4,

Page no. 100

29. Ground water quality monitoring minimum

at 6 locations should be carried out.

Geological features and geo hydrological

status of the study area and ecological

status (Terrestrial and Aquatic)

Refer Chapter 4, Table 35, Page no.

59 for ground water monitoring

locations.

Refer Annexure 4 and Annexure 5

30. The details of solid and hazardous wastes

generation, storage, utilization and disposal

particularly related to the hazardous waste

Refer Chapter 3, Section 3.7 & 3.8,

Page no. 46 & 47 for solid and

hazardous waste generation quantity


DEMO


calorific value of hazardous waste and

detailed characteristic of the hazardous

waste

Refer Chapter 6, Section 6.2.5 &

6.2.6, Page no. 101 for disposal plan

31. List of hazardous chemicals (as per MSIHC

rule) with toxicity levels

Demulsifier & HSD shall be used,

which shall be stored in less quantity

as per the requirement at site. The

quantity shall be less than the

prescribed threshold quantity of

MSIHC

32. Authorization/ membership for the disposal

of liquid effluent in CETP and solid/

hazardous waste in TSDF

If required, will be obtained during

operation phase

33. An action plan to develop green belt in 33 %

area


30 for phase wise development of

green belt

Refer Chapter 6, Table 53, page no.

96

34. Action plan for rain water harvesting

measures at plant site should be included to

harvest rainwater from the roof tops and

storm water drains to recharge the ground

water


no. 99

35. Details of occupational health programme

• To which chemicals, workers are

exposed directly or indirectly

• Whether these chemicals are within

Threshold Limit Values (TLV)/

Permissible Exposure Levels as per

ACGIH recommendation

• What measures company have taken to

keep these chemicals within PEL/ TLV

• How the workers are evaluated

concerning their exposure to chemicals

during pre placement and periodical

Refer Annexure 8 for detail risk

assessment report


DEMO


medical monitoring

• What are onsite and offsite emergency

plan during chemical disaster

Liver function tests (LFT) during pre

placement and periodical examination

36. Details of occupational health surveillance

programme

Refer Annexure 8 for detail risk

assessment report

37. Socio economic development activities

should be in place

Refer Chapter 8, Page no. 108

38. Note on compliance to the recommendations

mentioned in the CREP guidelines

Not applicable for oil & gas

exploration projects

39. Detailed environment management plan

(EMP) with specific reference to details of air

pollution control system, water and waste

water management, monitoring frequency,

responsibility and time bound

implementation plan for mitigation measure

should be provided

Refer Chapter 6, Page no. 93

40. Corporate Environmental Responsibility

(a) Does the company have a well laid down

environment policy approved by its Board of

directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA

report

(b) Does the Environmental Policy prescribe

for standard operation process/ procedures

to bring into focus any infringement/

deviation/ violation of the environmental or

forest norms/ conditions? If so, it may be

detailed in the EIA report

(c) What is the hierarchical system or

administrative order of the company to deal

with the environment issues and for

ensuring compliance with the EC conditions?

Details of this system may be given.


no. 102


DEMO


(d) Does the company have a system of

reporting of non compliance/ violations of

environmental norms to the Board of

Directors of the company and/ or

shareholders or stakeholders at large? This

reporting mechanism should be detailed in

the EIA report

41. Any litigation pending against the project

and/ or any direction/ order passed by any

court of law against the project, if so, details

thereof

Not applicable

42. At least 5 % of the total cost of the project

should be earmarked towards the Enterprise

Social Commitment based on Public Hearing

issues and item-wise details along with time

bound action plan should be prepared and

incorporated.

GSPC being Govt. of Gujarat

Company, it has always been

associated with various Socio –

Economic activities in the areas,

where GSPC operations are going on.

GSPC has also carried out various

social activities under the Directives

of Government Of Gujarat.

43. Public hearing issues raised and

commitments made by the project

proponent on the same should be included

separately in EIA/EMP report in the form of

tabular chart with financial budget for

complying with the commitments made

Minutes of meeting for public hearing

attached as Annexure 14

44. A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TORs


32

2.10.3 Structure of EIA Report

This report is organized in nine sections:

Sr. no. EIA structure Content

1 Executive Summary of Project Brief summary of report

2 Introduction Purpose of the report

• Identification of project & project proponent


DEMO


Brief description of nature, size, location of the

project and its importance to the country, region

Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping

carried out (As per Terms of Reference)

3 Project Description Depicts the details of the proposed project,

auxiliary and supporting facilities. It includes

technology and process description

4 Description of Environment Baseline environmental conditions in the vicinity of

the project site and within 5 Km radius of the

project. Data pertaining to the ambient air quality,

surface and ground water quality, soil quality, land-

use pattern, flora – fauna study and socioeconomic

environment has been presented

5 Anticipated environmental

impacts and mitigation

measures

Predicted environmental impacts due to

construction and operational phases of the

proposed installation of EPS. Air quality modeling

results and minimum required stack heights, water

requirement - wastewater generation and solid and

hazardous waste handling requirements have been

discussed. In addition to this the likely residual

impacts on the ecological and biological

environment and socioeconomic aspects have been

analyzed

6 Environment Management

Plan

Various environmental management plans. Various

resources conservation and recycling opportunities

has been discussed

7 Environment Monitoring

Program

Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of

mitigation measures (incl. frequency, location, data

analysis, reporting schedules, detailed budget)

8 Project Benefits Improvements in the physical infrastructure

Improvements in the social infrastructure

Employment potential –skilled; semi-skilled and

unskilled

Other tangible benefits


DEMO


9 Disclosure of Consultant The names of the Consultants engaged with their

brief resume and nature of Consultancy rendered

10 Additional studies as

Annexure

PH MOM, Risk Assessment and Disaster

Management Plan study


DEMO


Chapter 3 Process Description

3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION

3.1 PRODUCT DETAILS

GSPC Limited proposes to establish EPS at Village: Ambaliyara, District: Ahmedabad with

the production capacity as motioned in Table 21.


M-1 M 1 A-1



3.2 FUEL DETAILS

Fuel used will be mainly diesel and that too only for operation of stand by DG sets (63.5

KVA at each site). The detail of diesel consumption is as mentioned in Table 22.

Table 22: Detail of fuel consumption

EPS Fuel used Quantity

M 1 Diesel 4 liter/hour

M 1 A1 Diesel 4 liter/hour

Diesel shall be procured from local vendors as per the requirement.

3.3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION

Surface facility has been designed considering potential of well for the handling of

produced Fluid/hydrocarbons (Oil, Gas & water) from the Oil well. Surface production

facility mainly comprises of production, separation, storage, heating, crude loading

including fire fighting pump, fire hydrants and other safety provisions as per statutory

guidelines.

Reservoir pressure at both the site is sufficient for the production of crude oil and natural

gas. Initially oil shall be produced due to the naturally occurring pressure i.e. self flow at

site. After depletion of reservoir pressure, artificial lift will be installed to lift the fluid

from well bore up to surface.


DEMO


In order to operate the wells for the production of oil and gas, EPS shall be established.

The diagrammatic representation of production system with different parts is as shown in

Figure 6

Figure 6: Diagram of Sucker Rod Pump

Once the Crude Oil and associated gas are extracted from ground either due to self

pressure or with the help of pump jack, they will be diverted to two phase separator

wherein due to their density difference the same shall be separated.

Crude Oil shall be transferred to the temporary storage tanks and later transported to

ONGC for further processing.

Oil shall be maintained in liquid form by providing heat through bath heaters.

Associated gas will be used in bath heaters. Technical flaring of gas shall be envisaged.

Continue in

Figure 7


DEMO


The detail flow diagram of the process is as shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Flow Diagram of Production System

Process of Storage/handling of Hydrocarbon: Produced hydrocarbons from wells

flows through 4” over ground pipe line up to EPS main header.

Firstly in to the well manifold then the Fluid (Oil + gas) flows into the separators for

separation of Oil & Gas.

a. Handling of Crude oil: Separated oil flows into the over head storage tanks for

measurement & storage. Oil will be loaded in Oil tankers vide loading platform and

transported to ONGC-CTF Tank.

b. Handling of associated gas: Gas is piped to the Gas flow line after measurement

through gas meter. The gas will be fed to bath heater and the remaining gas will go to

flare stack for flaring

Well Head

EPS Header

Two Phase separator

Associated Natural Gas

Liquid crude oil & Water

Flaring Used in Bath Heater

Storage Tank

Loading point

Effluent water drain pit

Transported to

IOCL/ ONGC

Crude oil Water

Crude oil

Crude oil

Natural Hydrocarbon

Natural Hydrocarbon


DEMO


3.3.1 Two Stage Separator

Separator will be designed to separate production fluids into their constituents’

components of Oil, Gas and water. It will work on the principle of separation due to

density difference, velocity reduction, and gravity.

Once the oil and other fluids have been separated, the oil will leave the vessel at the

bottom through a dump valve that is controlled by the level controller. The gas which

has now been separated will reach to the top. This gas will leave through the top and is

passed through a meter run for measurement purposes.

One No. of Separator will be installed with liquid handling Capacity of 15 m3/day & Gas

handling capacity of 285 mm scf/day

3.3.2 Storage Tank

Two storage tanks shall be provided for temporary storage of oil at site. Each tank shall

have storage capacity of 45 m3.

3.3.3 Bath heater

Bath heater shall be installed for heating of crude oil to maintain its viscosity for easy

flow to the temporary storage tanks. Associated gas separated from the oil and gas

separators will be used as fuel for the operation of bath heaters.

1 No. Bath Heater will be installed for the proposed project with heating capacity at

Inlet: 20-30 Deg C & Outlet: 50-70 Deg C. Amount of fluid to be heated will be 1.0

MT/Hr.

3.3.4 Flare

After feeding to bath heater, the excess of associated gas shall be burnt by flaring at

site. Only flaring shall be envisaged. The height of stack shall be 9 m from ground level

as per OMR 1984 guideline.

3.3.5 Drain pit for waste water

Crude and water will be extracted in mixture from separator. Produced Water shall be

later drained from the crude oil and collected in waste water pit constructed specifically

for collection of produced water and for its further separation from any oil droplet.

The capacity of drain pit to be provided at site is 200 m3 (divided in to 2 equal halves of

100 m3)

3.3.6 Fire

Fire water tank will be constructed at site. The capacity of these tanks will be 200 m3

(divided in to 2 equal halves of 100 m3)


DEMO


3.3.7 Hazardous waste storage

Hazardous waste generated will be stored in isolated covered area in closed container

3.4 WATER

Water will be sourced from Ground water or tankers water.

3.4.1 Water Consumption

The total water consumption for the proposed project is as per Table 23

Table 23: Water Consumption

M 1 M 1 A 1





No water shall be required for any process activities in the proposed project. Apart from

domestic usage, water will be required as fire water make up.

3.4.2 Waste Water Generation

Waste water generation will be from domestic usage only. Apart from this, there will be

waste water generation in form of produced water during extraction of oil and gas in the

later stage. As with aging of field, reservoir water starts moving into the well and will be

produced along with crude oil. This is mainly due to increase of water saturation in

Hydrocarbon pore volume. The same shall be separated in the oil and gas separator and

due to density difference, it will be drained out. The separation process shall be done

such that the traces of oil or gas are to the minimum extent in the produced water. The

water shall meet the standards for land disposal. But for safer side, the produced water

shall be collected in waste water pit and later sent to CETP. The detail description of

waste water collection pit is discussed in chapter 6, Section 6.2.4, Page no. 100.

Domestic waste water shall be sent to septic tank/ soak pit


M1 M 1 A1





DEMO


3.5 ELECTRICITY

Source of Electricity for both the site will be Uttar Gujarat Vij Company Limited (UGVCL).

The total power requirement at both the sites is as mentioned in Table 25

Table 25: Electricity

M 1 M 1 A1

Power requirement Motive: 100 HP

Light: 25 KVA

Motive: 100 HP

Light: 25 KVA

Stand by DG set will be installed for emergency power supply.

Table 26: DG Sets

M 1 M 1 A1

DG set capacity 63.5 KVA 63.5 KVA

3.6 STACKS

Vent shall be provided in temporary storage tanks. Also stack shall be provided with oil

and gas separators and DG set. The details of stack are as given in Table 27.


M 1 M 1 A1

Stack attached to DG set Oil-gas

separator

(Flaring stack)

DG set Oil-gas

separator

(Flaring stack)

Stack height 5 m (as per

CPCB guideline)

9 m 5 m (as per

CPCB guideline)

9 m

3.7 SOLID WASTE GENERATION

The solid waste generated from the proposed project will be only in form of domestic

municipal waste

Table 28: Solid Waste Generation

M 1 M 1 A1

Domestic waste 2 kg/day 2 kg/day


DEMO


The waste generated will be disposed through local door to door collection facility from

municipality

3.8 HAZARDOUS WASTE

Hazardous waste generated from both the site is as given in Table 29

Table 29: Hazardous Waste

M 1 M 1 A1






be handed over to registered recyclers.


DEMO


Chapter 4 Baseline Environment

4 BASELINE STUDY

This chapter comprises of the present environment scenario with respect to ambient air,

water, soil, noise, socioeconomic data, flora and fauna and land use/ land cover of the

project site and the surrounding villages/ area in 5 Km radius.

The parameters corresponding to air, water, soil and noise, land use and bio ecology are

individually discussed in the upcoming sections. The photographs of baseline monitoring

are attached as Annexure 3.

4.1 METEOROLOGY STUDY

Online meteorology station was set at the project site and accordingly wind rose was

prepared to determine the predominant wind direction

The meteorology parameters studied at the project site are as below

Table 30: Meteorology Data

Parameters Min-Max observed

Wind speed 0 m/s – 9 m/s

Predominant Wind direction West to East

Temperature 26 °C – 46 °C

Relative humidity 9 % – 94 %

Wind rose for the study area was prepared and the predominant wind direction observed

during the study period was West to East. The wind rose diagram for the study period

(15th May 2013 to 15th June 2013) is as shown in Figure 8. The dominant stability class

during the study period of one month was found to be E (slightly stable). The dominant

stability class was calculated based on the mixing height data using ISC – ST 3 air

modeling software. The graph for same is depicted in Figure 9.


DEMO


Figure 8: Wind Rose Diagram


DEMO


Figure 9: Wind Class & Stability Class Frequency Distribution

4.2 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

4.2.1 Study period and area

The ambient air quality monitoring was carried out in 5 Km radius from the project site

(M 1 and M1 A1) during summer season for one month (15th May 2013 to 15th June

2013) as per the TOR issued by MoEF.

4.2.2 Details of Parameter monitored and analysis method adopted

The parameters were selected based on the TOR issued by MoEF. The list of parameters

monitored with the analysis method is as mentioned below:


DEMO


Table 31: Analysis methods

Parameter Frequency of

monitoring

Analysis method Detection

limit

Instrument Details

PM10 Twice in week

for 24 hours

IS:5182 (pt 23) 1.0 μg/m3 RDS Sampler, Weigh

Balance

PM2.5 Twice in week

for 24 hours

-- 8.0 μg/m3 PM2.5 Sampler, Weigh

Balance

SOx Twice in week

for 24 hours

IS:5182 (part 2): 2001, EPA

modified West & Gaeke method

1.6 μg/m3 RDS Sampler, Spectro

photometer

NOx Twice in week

for 24 hours

IS:5182 (part 6): 2006, Jacobs

Hochheiser method –Fifth revision

5.5 μg/m3 RDS Sampler, Spectro

photometer

VOC as BTX Twice in week Charcoal adsorption 0.1 ppm Gas Chromatography

HC Twice in week Grab sampling 0.1 ppm Gas Chromatography

4.2.3 Air Monitoring Locations

Total 6 monitoring locations were considered for the study of ambient air quality in the

study area. The locations were selected based on the TOR issued by MoEF and CPCB

guidelines for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring. Two downwind and two upwind directions

were selected for air quality monitoring.


DEMO


Figure 10: Air Monitoring Locations on site map of study area

AQ 1

AQ 2

AQ 3

AQ 4 AQ 5

AQ 6

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


The details of monitoring locations are as mentioned in the table below

Table 32: Air Monitoring Locations

Sampling

Station

Code Distance w. r. t

project site

(km)

Direction w. r. t

project site

Justificatio

n as per

wind

regime

Latitude

Longitude

M 1 M1 A1 M 1 M1 A1

Ambaliyara AQ 1 1.26 1.67 NW NW Upwind 22˚ 46’ 4.7” N 72˚ 30’ 1.1 E

Ambaliyara -

Dariyapura

AQ 2 1.89 1.65 E NEE Downwind 22˚ 45’ 37.9” N 72˚ 31’ 41.4” E

Rajpur AQ 3 3.08 2.81 SWW W Upwind 22˚ 45’ 23.3” N 72˚ 28’ 56.3” E

Sathal AQ 4 3.35 3.06 S S Crosswind 22˚43’ 50.4” N 72˚ 30’ 20.0” E

Kaloli AQ 5 4.44 4.01 SE SE Crosswind 22˚ 44’ 20.1” N 72˚ 32’ 46.5” E

Chitrasad AQ 6 2.77 2.62 NEE NEE Downwind 22˚ 45’ 56.6” N 72˚ 32’ 10.7” E


DEMO


4.2.4 Baseline Data

The observed 24-hour Minimum, Maximum and average concentrations of PM10, PM2.5

SO2, NOx, VOC as BTX (i.e. Benzene, Toluene, Xylene) and HC as methane and non

methane (C2 to C5) have been presented in table below

Table 33: Concentration of Various Pollutants

Parameters Observed values, µg/m3

SAMPLING LOCATIONS CPCB Standards

24 hourly, µg/m3

AQ 1 AQ 2 AQ 3 AQ 4 AQ 5 AQ 6 100

PM10

Minimum 78 80 77 88 81 75

Maximum 95 98 96 106 104 91

Average 86 89 84 94 92 83

98 Percentile 94 98 95 105 104 91

PM2.5 Minimum 33 39 12 25 17 24 60

Maximum 57 58 38 41 53 42

Average 45 49 23 34 31 34

98 Percentile 56 57 37 41 52 42

SOx Minimum 3.65 3.35 4.59 5.03 3.35 3.17 80

Maximum 10.85 11.04 12.03 13.02 9.57 8.78

Average 6.94 6.79 8.41 9.28 6.31 5.66

98 Percentile 10.57 10.67 11.89 12.91 9.43 8.64

NOx Minimum 6.86 5.95 7.27 10.90 5.25 5.15 80

Maximum 13.22 15.04 15.64 14.05 12.62 10.19

Average 9.97 10.57 11.95 13.21 9.84 8.26

98 Percentile 13.05 14.77 15.43 15.91 12.56 10.18

VOC as BTX Minimum ND ND ND ND ND ND ---

Maximum ND ND ND ND ND ND

Average ND ND ND ND ND ND

98 Percentile ND ND ND ND ND ND

HC Minimum ND ND ND ND ND ND ---

Maximum ND ND ND ND ND ND

Average ND ND ND ND ND ND

98 Percentile ND ND ND ND ND ND


DEMO


The detail monitoring results are attached as Annexure 10

PM10

Average Concentration of PM10 was found within the CPCB limits at all the monitoring

stations whereas 98th percentile value exceeded the CPCB limits at Sathal and Kaloli. The

higher side concentration was observed due to urbanization in the area and major

construction activities in the vicinity.

PM2.5

Average Concentration of PM2.5 was found below the limits prescribed by CPCB. Average

concentration for PM2.5 ranged between 23 μg/m3 to 49 μg/m3.

SOx

Average Concentration ranged between 5.66 μg/m3 to 9.28 μg/m3 and is well below the

CPCB limits.

NOx

Average Concentration ranged between 8.26 μg/m3 to 13.21 μg/m3 and is well below the

CPCB limits.

VOC

VOC were not detected during the study period.

HC

HC were not detected during the study period.

4.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT

4.3.1 Hydrology of area

The detail study on geohydrology was conducted in the area and the report for same is

attached as Annexure 4

From the observation and study of the relevant information of GWRDC Tube Wells in and

around the study area it is inferred that

• In and around the study area Ground water occurs in Alluvium aquifers which

comprises of alternate beds of sand, clay, kankar mixed with clay are occurring in

this area.

• The thickness and extent of this aquifer vary with respect to space and depth.

• In this area ground water occurs in the zone of primary porosity. The quantity of

ground water stored in the aquifer depends on the grain size of the aquifer

material, its hydraulic characteristics and thickness. Ground water is mainly


DEMO


occurring under unconfined shallow confined, deep confined or more precisely

semi-confined conditions.

From the observations of GWRDC tube well data it is observed that Ground water occurs

under confined or more precisely semi-confined conditions.

• It is pertinent to mention that Study area falls in the southern side of Sardar

Sarovar Canal Command Project.

• This area falls in critical Category from the ground water development point of

view.

• Narmada Main Canal is already in operation through which perennial water supply

has been started but this perennial water supply may be only for domestic

water supply

• The unconfined aquifers in and around the study area are practically dried up and

groundwater occurs mainly under shallow confined and deep confined condition.

The depth of tube well in and around the adjacent area is ranging from 188m

deep (Virpur) to 247m deep at (Dholka) below ground level. At Ambaliyara, it is

around 145 - 170m deep below ground level (Plate )

Gujarat Water Resources Development Corporation (GWRDC) Gandhinagar is monitoring

observation tube wells for periodic measurements of water level fluctuations and water

quality variation in and around the study area. One such tube wells tapping deep

confined aquifers at village Chaloda is monitored for periodic measurements of water

level fluctuations and water quality variation.

Figure 11: Hydrograph of Village: Chaloda, Taluka: Dholka, District: Ahmedabad


DEMO


Hydrograph Analysis

The long-term water level fluctuation data for the period 1998 to-2002 of the nearest

observation tube well located at village Chaloda, Taluka Dholka of Ahmedabad District

was examined and is given in Hydrograph as shown in Figure 11.

From the observation of these hydrographs, following conclusion could be drawn.

• The overall Rising trend is observed in water level which could be attributed

due to improved recharge condition due to assured surface water supply in

upstream North, and North East direction of the study area

• Assured/perennial surface water supply will be through Sardar Sarovar Project

Canal Command, Irrigation Department, Government of Gujarat.

• In addition to rainfall recharge to ground water aquifer, now due to this surface

water supply,

(i) Seepage through canal network and

(ii) Return seepage from irrigated field are the recharge components contributing

recharge to ground water aquifer

It is reflected in water level profile of Hydrograph which shows rising trend

4.3.2 Baseline study

Total six nos. of sample for ground water (as per TOR) and five surface water samples

were collected to evaluate the water quality around 5 Km radius from the project site.

4.3.3 Study period and sampling frequency

The water samples were collected once in the study period during summer season for

one month (15th May 2013 to 15th June 2013) as per the TOR issued by MoEF.

4.3.4 Details of Parameter monitored and analysis method adopted

The analysis method followed for measuring different parameters to evaluate water

quality is given in the table below

Table 34: Analysis method for water parameters

Parameter Units Applicable standard method of analysis

Detection limit

Electrical conductivity Umho/cm

IS – 3025 (Part –14) -1984 (1st Revision) (RA - 1996)

1

pH --

IS-3025(Part 11):1983 (RA 2002)

1.0

Nitrite (NO2) mg/L IS- 3025 (Part – 34 – 4) 0.1

Nitrate (NO3) mg/L IS – 3025 (Part – 34) 1988 0.1

Phosphorus as phosphate mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed. 4500 P .D.

0.02


DEMO


Potassium mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed. 3500 – K

2.0

Calcium (Ca) mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed. 3500 Ca – B.

2.0

Magnesium (Mg) mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed. 3500 Mg – B.

2.0

Carbonate (CO3) mg/L IS – 3025 (Part –51) :2001 5.0

Bicarbonates (HCO3) mg/L IS – 3025 (Part –51):2001 5.0

Chlorides (Cl) mg/L

IS-3025(part 32)-1988 (RA-1999)

1.0

Sulphate (SO4) mg/L Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed 4500 E

2.0

COD mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed. 5220 B. 5- 19

2.0

Silica (SiO2) mg/L Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed.500-D

0.12

Fluoride mg/L Standard Methods – APHA 22nd ED, 4500-F-D

0.05

Boron mg/L Standard Methods – APHA 22nd ED, 4500 B

0.01

TDS mg/L IS-3025(part 16)-1984 (RA 1996)

4.00

DO mg/L

IS – 3025 (Part –38) -(Reaffirmed – 1999)

1.0

Sodium mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd ED 3500 - Na B.

2.0

BOD5days mg/L IS – 3025 (Part –44) -1993 (RA-1999)

4.0

TON mg/L

IS – 3025 (Part –44) -1993 (RA-1999)

4.0

Sodium Adsorption ratio mg/L Calculative Method -

Total Coliform mg/L IS : 1622 – 1981 ( RA – 1996) -

COD mg/L

Standard Methods – APHA 22nd Ed. 5220 B. 5- 19

2.0

4.3.5 Water Sampling Locations

Water sampling locations for ground and surface water samples are as mentioned in

Table 35.


DEMO


Table 35: Water Monitoring Locations

Monitoring

Location

Station

code

Source of

water

Distance from site Direction w.r.t. site Date of sampling

M 1 M 1 A1 M 1 M 1 A1

Ground Water

Project Site

M1A1

GW 1 Bore well -- -- -- -- 24/5/2013

Project Site

M 1

GW 2 Bore well -- -- -- -- 24/05/2013

Ambaliyara GW 3 Bore well 1.51 1.92 NW NW 24/05/2013

Dariyapura GW 4 Bore well 1.90 1.69 E NEE 24/05/2013

Rajpur GW 5 Bore well 2.97 3.19 SWW W 28/05/2013

Sathal GW 6 Bore well 3.0 2.75 SSW SSW 28/05/2013

Surface Water

Ambaliyara SW 1 Pond 1.70 2.10 NW NW 24/5/2013

Dariyapura SW 2 River 2.25 2.16 NE NE 24/05/2013

Rajpur SW 3 Pond 2.79 3.00 SWW SWW 28/05/2013

Naika SW 4 Pond 6.85 6.55 SE SE 31/05/2013

Sathal SW 5 Pond 3.00 2.70 SSW SSW 28/05/2013

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


4.3.6 Ground Water Quality

The baseline ground water quality observed during the study period at the above locations is as mentioned in Table 36

Table 36: Ground Water Quality

Parameters Unit Monitoring location Limit as per

IS:10500:2012

GW 1 GW 2 GW 3 GW 4 GW 5 GW 6 Desirable

limit

Permissible

limit Project Site

M1A1

Project Site

M1

Ambaliyara Dariyapura Rajpur Sathal

Bore well Bore well Bore well Bore well Bore well Bore well

Electrical Conductivity

μmho/

cm

2640 2460 2680 5220 3000 3300 NS NS

pH -- 7.63 8.05 7.49 6.98 7.34 7.47 6.5-8.5 No relax

Nitrite (NO2) mg/L ND 0.022 ND ND ND ND NS NS

Nitrate (NO3) mg/L 15.4 4.72 13.7 18.0 14.4 1.92 45 No relax

Phosphate mg/L ND ND ND 0.15 ND 0.60 NS NS

Potassium mg/L ND 03 05 ND ND 03 NS NS

Calcium mg/L 92.18 88.18 108 216 111 196 75 200

Magnesium mg/L 13.12 12.64 11.66 87.48 16 12 30 100

Carbonate mg/L 20 80 ND ND ND 12 NS NS

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Bicarbonate mg/L 350 180 340 640 400 294 NS NS

Hardness mg/L 284 272 318 900 344 540 300 600

Alkalinity mg/L 370 260 340 640 400 306 200 600

Chlorides mg/L 532 493 590 1063 600 590 250 1000

Sulphate mg/L 143 122 130 481 128 274 200 400

COD mg/L 20 30 20 20 ND 10 NS NS

Silica (SiO2) mg/L 41.4 80.2 78.4 68.4 2.78 3.06 NS NS

Fluoride mg/L 1.18 0.64 0.75 0.80 0.88 0.77 1 1.5

Boron mg/L 0.07 0.08 0.07 0.02 0.05 ND 0.5 1.0

TDS mg/L 1135 1058 1152 2245 1290 1419 500 2000

NS: Not specified

The detail ground water analysis results are attached as Annexure 11

Conclusion

Water Quality of bore well at Dariyapura exceeded the permissible limits for TDS, calcium, hardness, alkalinity, chloride and sulphate.

Fluoride was found within the desirable limits (Table 36) at all the studied locations. TDS level was higher than the desirable limit at all

the sampling locations. None of the studied well locations for ground water were fit for drinking purpose.

The main source of drinking water for sampling locations is Narmada canal supply. Water from bore well was mainly used for the purpose

other than drinking.

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


4.3.7 Surface Water Quality

The baseline surface water quality in the study area is as mentioned below

Table 37: Surface Water Quality

Parameters Unit Monitoring Locations

SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5

Ambaliyara Dariyapura Rajpur Naika Sathal

Pond River Pond Pond Pond

Electrical

Conductivity

μmho/C 4700 3520 8500 6440 23300

pH -- 8.20 7.50 9.23 7.97 8.00

DO mg/L 7.0 6.9 6.0 5.0 6.0

TDS mg/L 2021 1514 3655 2770 10019

Nitrite (NO2) mg/L ND ND ND ND 0.011

Nitrate (NO3) mg/L 0.08 0.21 0.79 2.70 5.83

Phosphate mg/L 0.38 8.43 ND ND 0.66

Potassium mg/L 40 22 15 20 30

Calcium mg/L 144 107 144 216 353

Magnesium mg/L 9.72 6.80 27 15 150

Sodium mg/L 655 498 1178 1240 2990

Carbonate mg/L 140 ND 400 60 72

Bicarbonate mg/L 348 600 560 450 204

Hardness mg/L 400 296 470 600 1500

Alkalinity mg/L 488 600 960 480 276

Chloride mg/L 638 686 1411 1160 6380

Sulphate mg/L 280 113 445 370 1517

BOD5days mg/L 06 34 29 08 14

Ammoniacal

nitrogen

mg/L 6.72 22.96 12.32 11.2 7.84

Sodium -- 23.4 13.5 23.6 22 33.6


DEMO


Adsorption ratio

Boron mg/L 0.13 ND 0.22 0.10 0.34

Total Coliform MPN/100 ml >110000 24000 24000 46000 >110000

COD mg/L 80 340 260 60 380

ND: Not Detected

The detail surface water analysis results are attached as Annexure 11

The above surface water samples were compared with standards given by CPCB for used base classification of surface water in India. The standards are as mentioned in Table 38.

Table 38: Use based classification of surface water in India

Designated Best Use Class of

water

Criteria

Drinking water source

without conventional

treatment but after

disinfection

A 1. Total Coliform organism MPN/100 ml shall be 50

or less

2. pH between 6.5 and 8.5

3. Dissolved oxygen 6 mg/L or more

4. Biochemical oxygen demand 5 days, 20 deg C, 2

mg/l or less

Outdoor bathing

(Organized)

B 1. Total Coliform organism MPN/100 ml shall be

500 or less

2. pH between 6.5 and 8.5

3. Dissolved oxygen 5 mg/l or more


mg/l or less

Drinking water source

after conventional

treatment and

disinfection

C 1. Total Coliform organism MPN/100 ml shall be

5000 or less

2. pH between 6 to 9

3. Dissolved oxygen 4 mg/L or more


mg/l or less

Propagation of wild life

and fishery

D 1. pH between 6.5 to 8.5


DEMO


2. Dissolved oxygen 4 mg/l or more

3. Free ammonia (as N) 1.2 mg/l or less

Irrigation, industrial

cooling, controlled

waste disposal

E 1. pH between 6 to 8.5

2. Electrical conductivity at 25 deg C µmho/cm

maximum 2250

3. Sodium absorption ratio max 26

4. Boron max 2 mg/l

Conclusion

The surface water at Ambaliyara falls under Class B category of water as per CPCB standards (Table 38). The water was used mainly for cattle washing and drinking purpose.

Surface water of others locations were used for washing of clothes and cattle.

4.4 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

Soil samples were taken from the location within 5 Km radius of project site during

summer season for one month (15th May 2013 to 15th June 2013) as per the TOR issued

by MoEF. Monitoring for soil was done once in season. The details of methodology used

for soil sampling and analysis is as given in Table 39

Table 39: Methodology of soil sample analysis

Physical and Chemical

Parameters UNIT

Details of instrument used for

analysis.

Applicable standard method for sample analysis

Bulk Density

gm/cm3 Weigh Balance METHODS OF SOIL ANALYSIS, part – 1 (chemical & microbial properties :, By C.A. Black (American Society of Agronomy & ASTM)

Water Holding Capacity

% - Hand book of Methods in Environmental Studies

(Vol: 2- Air, Noise , Soil & overburden Analysis)

Porosity %

Grain Size distribution

Gravel %

Hand book of Methods in Environmental Studies

Silt %


DEMO


Sand % Sieve Shaker &

weigh Balance


Clay %

Soil texture - - Hand book of Methods in Environmental Studies


Soil Colour --- - -

pH --- pH Meter IS – 2720 ( Part – 26) – 1987

(RA – 2002)

Conductivity µS/cm Conductivity Meter IS 14767 : 2000 (Reaff.2010)

Nitrogen as N % Distillation Assembly IS 14684 : 1989 (Reaff.2000)

Phosphorus

mg/kg UV-VIS Spectrophotometer

METHODS OF SOIL ANALYSIS, part – 2 (chemical & microbial properties :, By C.A. Black (American Society of Agronomy & ASTM)

Potassium as K

mg/kg Flame phototmeter METHODS OF SOIL ANALYSIS, part – 2 (chemical & microbial properties :, By C.A. Black (American Society of Agronomy & ASTM)

Sodium as Na

mg/kg METHODS OF SOIL ANALYSIS, part – 2 (chemical & microbial properties :, By C.A. Black (American Society of Agronomy & ASTM)

SAR

- -

Calculative Method

Calcium as Ca

mg/kg - METHODS OF SOIL ANALYSIS, part – 1 (chemical & microbial properties :, By C.A. Black (American Society of Agronomy & ASTM)

Nitrate as NO3-N

mg/kg UV-VIS Spectrophotometer

IS 14684 : 1989 (Reaff.2000)

Sulphate as SO4 mg/kg UV-VIS

Spectrophotometer IS – 2720 ( Part – XXVII) – 1977 (RA – 2006)

Organic matter % - IS – 2720 (Part – 22) – 1973

Reaffirmed – 2006


DEMO


The soil quality observed at the monitoring locations with details of sampling locations is

given in Table 40

Table 40: Soil monitoring location and Soil Quality

Parameters Unit Monitoring Location

SQ 1 SQ 2 SQ 3 SQ 4

Project site of M 1 A 1 Project site of M 1 Ambaliyara Dariyapura

05/06/2013 05/06/2013 05/06/2013 05/06/2013

Bulk Density gm/cm3 0.60 0.59 0.63 0.68

Water Holding Capacity % 49 49 43 48

Soil Color --- Yellow Yellow Brown Brown

Porosity % 77 78 76 74

Grain size distribution

Gravel % 11 07 10 06

Coarse % 24 18 26 21

Medium % 39 50 48 44

Fine Sand % 18 21 10 20

Silt and Clay % 08 04 06 09

pH --- 7.89 8.90 7.83 7.85

Conductivity μmho/cm 1045 558 1214 657

Nitrogen as N % 0.013 0.011 0.012 0.013

Phosphorus mg/gm 0.640 0.487 0.584 0.638

Potassium as K mg/gm 0.01 0.01 0.002 0.01

Sodium mg/gm 0.083 0.049 0.070 0.038

Calcium as Ca mg/gm 0.135 0.128 0.094 0.115

Nitrate as NO3-N mg/gm 0.079 0.018 0.062 0.025

Sulphate as SO4 mg/gm 0.901 0.725 0.874 1.002

SAR mg/gm 4.3 2.13 4.48 1.2

Organic matter % 2.07 1.82 0.81 2.41


DEMO


4.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The ambient noise environment consists of the total noise generated in the area at

various distances around the sampling locations. The noise level varies depending on the

type of activities carried out in the surrounding area. The baseline noise environment

was studied at the project site as well as the surrounding villages. The locations

considered for the noise monitoring are tabulated below along with the CPCB limits. The

base line level of noise is as given in the Table 42

Table 41: Noise Monitoring Location

Sampling Station Type of area Station Code

Ambaliyara Residential NQ 1

Dariyapura Residential NQ 2

Rajpur Residential NQ 3

Sathal Residential NQ 4

Kaloli Residential NQ 5

Chitrasar Residential NQ 6

Table 42: Noise quality in study area

Area

code

Equivalent Noise Level L(eq) in dB(A) CPCB Limits

Day Times Night Time Day time Night time

NQ 1 40.5 37.6 55 45

NQ 2 48.3 40.3 55 45

NQ 3 46.5 39.3 55 45

NQ 4 50.2 43.2 55 45

NQ 5 42.9 38.9 55 45

NQ 6 39.9 36.4 55 45


DEMO


Conclusion

Daytime and night time noise levels are within the CPCB ambient noise level standards

at all locations.

4.6 LAND USE STUDY A detailed study for land use study was conducted in the area and detail report for same

is attached as Annexure 6.

4.6.1 Primary Data Collection

The land use/land cover mapping was carried out using digital satellite imagery procured

from NRSA, Hyderabad. Details of the satellite data are as given in Table 43

Table 43: Details of Satellite Data

Satellite Sensor Bands Year

Resourcesat 2 LISS IV 2,3,4 January, 2012

4.6.2 Secondary Data Collection

The ancillary data collected for the study were from the below mentioned source.

• District Planning Series Map: Survey of India, Department of Science and

Technology, Government of India copyright 2002.

• Census 2001: Gujarat Administrative Atlas, Census of India 2001, Directorate of

Census Operations, Gujarat

4.6.3 Area Statistics of Land Use/ Cover Classes

The area statistics of these classes are presented in Table 44. The major portion of the

study region is covered by Agriculture followed by Open Vegetation and Scrub.

Table 44: Land use/cover Classes Area Statistics within 10 km Radius of Project Site

Class Area (Ha.) Area (sq. km.) Area (%)

Agriculture 24672.18 246.72 78.57

Scrub 1415.91 14.16 4.51

Open Vegetation 1871.34 18.71 5.96

Close Vegetation 22.00 0.22 0.07

Habitation 1058.59 10.59 3.37

Industrial Area 620.00 6.20 1.97


DEMO


Water Body 342.38 3.42 1.09

River 431.00 4.30 1.37

Salt Affected Land 15.29 0.15 0.05

Barren Land 87.67 0.88 0.28

Sandy Area 237.50 2.37 0.76

Aquatic Vegetation 65.05 0.65 0.21

Plantation 561.88 5.62 1.79

Total 31400.79 313.99 100 %

The salt affected area is located in small patches. The distance of salt affected area from

the project site is as mentioned below

Table 45: Distance of Salt affected area

EPS Distance Direction

M1A1 3.37 Km NE

M1 3.37 Km NE

M1 A1 2.75 Km SE

M1 3.14 Km SE

M1 A1 4.73 Km NW

M1 4.34 Km NW


DEMO


Figure 12: Land use/ Land cover – M 1 & M1 A 1 for 10 Km radius from project site

4.7 BIO ECOLOGY STUDY

The baseline study, for the preparation of inventory of the floral and faunal biodiversity

of the terrestrial environment of the study area, within 5 km radius from the identified

EPS sites of M-1 and M-1 A-1 was conducted and a detailed report is attached as

Annexure 5.


DEMO


4.7.1 Floral Diversity of Study Area

The following account of floral inventory has been, based on the field survey conducted

for a short duration in the June 2013, is not very comprehensive data and is aimed only

to give a general pattern of vegetation of this region during the study period as a

baseline data in absence of available secondary data.

Trees

The dominant trees in the study area were generally planted as the road side plantation

or along the agriculture fields for shades. Otherwise natural tree cover is very less in this

part of Ahmedabad District. Dominant tree species were, Mangifera indica, Tamarindus indica (Amali), Azadirachta indica (Limbado), Prosopis cineraria (Khyigdo), Ailanthus

excelsa (Aurdso) and Salvadorao leoides (Piludi)

29 species of trees belong to 20 families are enumerated from the study area. The detail

lists of trees observed during primary survey are mentioned in Annexure 5.

Shrubs

29 shrub species belong to 15 families are enumerated from the study area. The

dominant shrub community in this area was represented by, Calotropis procera, C.

gigantea (Akado), Prosopis juliflora (Gando baval), Ipomoea fistulosa (Nasarmo),

Lawsonia inermis (Mendhi), and Lantana camara (Ganthai). The detail lists of shrubs

observed during primary survey are mentioned in Annexure 5.

Herbs

As the study area is dominated by the waterlogged grass lands and paddy fields, with

remarkably rich herbaceous ground cover. 77 species of herbs belongs to 30 families

were documented from the sampling plots laid in different habitats. The herbs observed

in the sampling plots, during the survey period in the study area have been enlisted in

Annexure 5.

Climbers & Twiners

Climbers/ twiners in the study area dominated by Ipomoea pes-tigridis (Wagpadi),

Ipomea pes-caprae (Dariani vel), Ipomea aquatica (Nali ni Bhaji), Coccinia grandis

(Ghiloda), Luffa cylindrica (Galku) and Abrus precatorius (Chanothai). 25 species of

climbers/ twiners belongs to 8 families are recorded from the area

The major climbers and twiners observed in the study area in the sampling plots are

given in Annexure 5.


DEMO


Cultivated Plants in Study area

The agricultural practices have occupied the majority of available landscape. The major

agriculture activities of this region vary seasonally. Rice (Oryza sativa) is the major crop

during the monsoon period while wheat (Triticum aestivum) is cultivated as major crop

during winter. The crop occupying the highest percentage of the sown area of this region

is taken as the major crop and all other possible alternative crops which are sown in this

region either as substitutes of the base crop in the same season or as the crops which fit

in the rotation in the subsequent season, are considered as minor crop

Major Crops

Major crops in the study area are Rice (Oryza sativa L.) and Wheat (Triticuma aestivum)

Minor Crops

The minor crops of this region are Bajra (Pennisetum typhoides) and Jowar (Sorghum

bicolar)

Vegetables

Many villages in the study area are actively engaged in the cultivation of Bhindi

(Abelmoschus esculentus), especially at Navapura village, Chandisar village, and

Ambaliyara village

Horticultural Practices and Fruit grown

Horticulture activity is not much developed in this region of Ahmedabad district

Rare and Endangered Flora in Study Area

Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat

category by RED data book of Indian Plants, (Nayar and Sastry, 1990) and Red list of

threatened Vascular plants (IUCN, 2010, BSI, 2003)

Endemic Plants of Study Area

Among recorded plant species, during the survey period, none can be assigned the

status of endemic plant of this region.

Status of Forest & their category in Study

No natural forest land was observed in the study area except few scattered scrub cover

in the barren lands and area demarcated for grazing.


DEMO


4.7.2 Faunal Biodiversity of Study Area

The list of Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of

occurrence along with other observed fauna like butterflies, reptiles and mammals is

discussed in Annexure 5.

Rare and Endangered Fauna in Study Area

As per IUCN Red list of threatened species (2012), among the sighted animal species

(Grusantigone) Sarus Crane is categorized as vulnerable. Two birds are grouped under

near threatened category i.e. Painted stork (Mycteria leucocephala) and Oriental Darter

(Anhinga melanogaster). None of them sited within 1 km radius from the well location.

Table 46: Near Threatened Birds of Study Area

Species Habitat Location Coordinates Distance

from

site

Number Threat

status

(IUCN,2012)

Sarus Crane

(Grus Antigone)

Shallow Water

bodies, Paddy

Fields

Sarthal

Village

220 43’ 39.2” N

720 29’ 35.1” E

approx 2

Km

Two Vulnerable

ver. 3.1

Painted stork

(Mycteria

leucocephala)

Shallow water

bodies, Trees

near water

bodies

Rajpur

Village

220 45’ 37.0” N

720 29’ 22.7” E

approx

3.9 km

Four Near

threatened

ver.3.1

Oriental Darter

(Anhinga

melanogaster)

Shallow water

bodies, Paddy

fields

Sarthal

Village

Near

GIDC

Dholka

220 43’ 42.8” N

720 29’ 47.7.1”

E

220 42’ 51.6” N

720 28’ 20.3” E

approx

3.5 km

approx

6.25 km

One

One

Near

threatened

ver.3.1

Source: IUCN Red list of threatened species, 2012 and Bird life international 2012

The location at which, these near threatened birds were spotted is shown in Figure 13.

The spotted sites were not observed in the impact zone of the project site as discussed

in chapter 5, section 5.1, page no. 78


DEMO


Figure 13: Google Map showing the area where near threatened birds were spotted during field study

As per Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972

Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide

for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith

or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and

environmental security of the country.

Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act,

1972 by including them in different schedules. Among the birds in the study area, Pea

fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in schedule I of Wild life protection Act (1972), while

many other birds are included in schedule IV.

Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja) and Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus)

were provided protection as per Schedule-II of Wild life protection act 1972.

N


DEMO


Among mammals Bengal hanuman langur (Semnopithecus entellus - Dufresne) and

Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), are a schedule –II mammals. Nilgai

(Boselaphus tragocamelus) and Wild Boars (Sus scrofa Linnaeus) are provided protection

by incorporating them in schedule–III mammal. Hares and five stripped squirrels are

included in schedule IV of Wild Life Protection act 1972.

Table 47: Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act 1972

Group Species Schedule

Birds Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus), Schedule I

Most of other birds Schedule-IV

Reptiles Indian Cobra (Naja naja), Schedule-II

Common rat snake (Ptyas mucosus) Schedule-II

Mammals Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), Schedule-II

Five striped Palm squirrel

(Funambulus pennanii ( Wroughton))

Schedule-IV

Hare (Lepus sp.) Schedule-IV

Nilgai (Boselaphus tragocamelus) Schedule-III

Bengal Hanuman Langur, (Semnopithecus

entellus (Dufresne)

Schedule-II

Wild Boars (Sus scrofa Linnaeus) Schedule-III

4.8 SOCIO ECONOMIC DATA

Socio economic data are drawn from the primary sources like census and district

statistical hand book etc. We defined the frame work of socio economic environment in

terms of the following components

1. Demographic characteristics which defines the human development level of the

village community

2. Economic characteristics which provides indicator of the economic development

level

3. Social data matrix which provide the social composition of the community which

would reflect the socio cultural dimensions

A detailed analysis will not only highlight the relevant issues but also would provide

guiding path of the development of the project area villages. Details socio economic

report is attached as Annexure 7.


DEMO


Demographic Characters

Secondary data demographic structure of the project area is collected from census book

2011 is as mentioned in Table 48

Table 48: Demographic structure of the project area

Total population 385136

Total house hold 78314

Total male population 200610

Total female population 184526

Sex ratio 920

Literate population 259868

Female literacy 108834

Female literacy ratio 28 %

Tribal population 59328

Tribal population ratio 15%

Non tribal population 325808

Total working population 155856

Total non working population 229280

Infrastructural Support Facilities in the Project Area

Infrastructural facilities like educational facility, medical facility, transportation,

communication, power supply and water are available in villages of study area.

Economic Structure and their Implications

Economic structure of village economy is generally characterized by the economic

activity levels of poverty and unemployment and agricultural sector and non agricultural

sector and position and economic class etc.

Table 49: Economic Structure of Village Economy

Indicator

Total workers 155856

Main workers 124966


DEMO


Non workers 229280

Agricultural workers 68406

Total cultivators 27974

Marginal cultivators 2145

Non agricultural activities 54729


DEMO


Chapter 5 Impact Identification & Mitigation Measures

5 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION

Identification of significant impacts from the proposed project is an eminent step in the

process of environmental impact assessment. This provides a way forward to other

elements of EIA study such as quantification and evaluation of site specific impacts

exclusively from proposed project. As the first step towards the prediction and

assessment, the various activities during the construction and operational phase, which

are likely to cause an impact on these parameters, have been listed. The next step

would be to evaluate quantitatively and qualitatively the impact imposed on the various

aspects of the environment.

Many scientific techniques and methodologies are available to predict impacts on

physico-ecological and socio-economic environment. Such predictions are superimposed

over the baseline (pre-project) status of environmental quality to derive the ultimate

(post-project) scenario of environmental conditions. The prediction of impacts helps to

identify and implement environmental management plan during and after the execution

of the developmental power plant activity to minimize the deterioration of environmental

quality.

5.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT

Source of emission will impact the air environment in the area. The source of emission

will be mainly in form of point source and fugitive emission.

Fugitive emission

Fugitive emission will occur due to transportation activities. Apart from transportation,

rupture of valve and flanges will lead to minor fugitive emission from pipes and tank.


Point source emission will be mainly due to stacks installed with stand by DG set. The

detail of stack considered for air modeling is as given in Table 50. Flaring will be

temporary activity wherein the gas produced will be burnt. Hydrocarbon in major portion

with traces of CO2 will be emitted. Hence the flaring stack is not considered in air

modeling study.


DEMO



Site

Particulars

M 1 M 1 A 1

Stack attached to DG Set DG Set

Capacity of DG set 63.5 KVA 63.5 KVA

Stack height 5 m 5 m

Stack Diameter 0.101 m 0.101 m

Exit Gas Velocity 9.95 m/s 9.95 m/s

Exit Gas temperature 181 °C 181 °C

Emission in g/s PM: 0.0121 g/s

SOx: 0.02 g/s

NOx: 0.091 g/s

PM: 0.0121 g/s

SOx: 0.02 g/s

NOx: 0.091 g/s

Details of Air Modeling

The DG set stack details were used as input data for prediction of impact due to

proposed point source emission in the area.

The incremental increase in the concentration of pollutants, after the installation of the

proposed stacks was predicted using mathematical model.

Industrial Source Complex – Short Term 3 (ISC-ST 3) model by Lakes and Environment

was used for the prediction of incremental increase.

The ISCST-3 (Industrial Source Complex – Short term 3) from lakes and Environment is

based on Gaussian Plume Model. For the present study, this model is used for the

prediction of maximum ground level concentration (GLC). ISCST3 model is executed

using stability classes developed by Pasquill and Gifford.

The inputs data given to the model includes data relating to emissions (stack details as

mentioned in Table 50) with effective stack height, hourly meteorology details like

ambient temperature, wind speed, wind direction, relative humidity, pressure, cloud

cover etc for summer season.

After giving the input data to the model, the incremental concentration of the pollutant

due to the point sources from the proposed activities was calculated. The maximum

incremental concentration due to emission from point sources was recorded at the

respective location with its distance and direction from the proposed project site.


DEMO


The maximum incremental ground level concentration was superimposed on the

maximum average baseline concentration in the respective location at the recorded

distance and direction by the model.

The maximum predicted 24 hr average concentration of pollutants at that distance for

DG set Stacks is given below:

Table 51: Resultant Concentration due to incremental increase for DG set stack

Pollutant Incremental

Concentration

μg/m3

Baseline

Concentration

μg/m3 *

Resultant

Concentration

μg/m3

Direction

w.r.t.

stack

location

Distance

w.r.t.

stack

location

PM 0.277 89 89.277 East 0.5 km

SO2 0.459 6.79 7.249 East 0.5 km

NOx 2.089 10.57 12.659 East 0.5 km

* Baseline average concentration of location in east direction from the project site was

considered (AQ2)

Conclusion

The above scenario will be applicable only when DG sets are operative. The principal

source of electricity for the project will be State Electricity Board. Only in rare cases

when there will be power failure DG sets will be operative and the scenario discussed

here will become applicable. Also Flaring will be temporary activity wherein the gas

produced will be burnt. Hydrocarbon in major portion with traces of CO2 will be emitted.

Hence the flaring stack is not considered in air modeling study for PM, SOx, NOx.

As tabulated in Table 51, the maximum incremental concentration for Particulate matter,

Sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxide is found to be 0.277 μg/m3, 0.459 μg/m3, 2.089

μg/m3 respectively. The incremental increase was observed in East direction at distance

of 0.5 Km.

The incremental increase calculated by the air modelling software was super impose on

the average concentration observed at monitoring location (AQ2) which was located in

down wind direction (east) of the project site.

It is observed from Table 51, that the resultant concentration for Particulate matter, SO2

and NOx are observed to be below the National Ambient Air Quality Standards published

by CPCB during the study period.


DEMO


Figure 14: Isopleths for PM

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Figure 15: Isopleths for SOx

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Figure 16: Isopleths for NOx

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


5.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Source of Water

Tanker Water or ground water shall be used for the proposed project

Water Consumption

The total water requirement is 2.705 KL/day at each well. Water will be only used for

domestic purpose and as storage water for fire hydrant system. There shall be no water

requirement for any process activity.

The details of water consumption is discussed in Chapter 3, Section 3.4, Page no. 45.

Waste Water Generation

During the production of crude oil and natural gas, produced water will be generated

from the process. Total quantity of produced water generated at EPS#M1 will be 2

KL/day and EPS#M 1 A 1 will be 3 KL/day. The separation process shall be done such

that the traces of oil or gas are to the minimum extent in the produced water. The water

shall meet the standards for land disposal. But for safer side, the produced water shall

be collected in waste water pit and later sent to nearby CETP. The detail description of

waste water collection pit is discussed in chapter 6, Section 6.2.4, Page no. 100

Domestic waste water generated will be disposed off through soak pit.

5.3 SOLID WASTE GENERATION

2 Kg/day quantity of domestic waste will be generated. The same shall be disposed off

locally through nearest municipality collection system.

5.4 HAZARDOUS WASTE GENERATION

Used oil, oily sludge and oily cotton waste will be generated from the proposed project

activity. The spillage of the same on ground will lead to contamination of the soil in the

area.

In order to prevent the same, the hazardous waste generated will be collected separately

and stored in closed container in isolated area.

15 liter/ annum of used oil will be generated. The same shall be used in internal purpose

for greasing of fitting, valves, nut bolts etc, whereas oily cotton waste and oily sludge

will be handed over to registered recyclers.

5.5 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

There shall be positive impact on the socio economic environment of the area. Increase

in direct/ indirect job opportunity shall take place. Services in the locality shall be used

and accordingly growth in economic structure of the area will take place.


DEMO


5.6 SUMMARY OF IMPACTS IDENTIFIED AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES

The list of activities to be undertaken as part of the project is as noted below

Land acquisition and site preparation

• Land acquisition

• Site preparation

• Access and Transportation

Operation of EPS with all the process activities

• Abstraction of oil from well

• Operation of gas and oil separators

• Generation of produced water

• Transfer of oil to temporary tank storage farm

• Temporary storage tank

• Transfer from storage to tankers

Allied activities

• Operation of DG set

• Operation of flare stack

• Hazardous waste generation due to different activities

• Socio economic details

The above activities with their impact and mitigation measures are as listed in Table 52.


DEMO


Table 52: Impact Identification and mitigation measures

Sr.

No.

Major processes Impacting activities Mitigation measures

Mitigation measures Specification for mitigation

measures proposed

1. Land acquisition • No further land acquisition No extra land to be procured Land has been taken on lease

during drilling. No additional land

acquisition

2. Access • Upto EPS, road infra available ---- Accessibility of site through

temporary kachcha road.

3. Site preparation • Well drilled by company and

other infrastructure facility

like internal road, fire

fighting, security cabin

construction at site

• Additionally it is required to

construct storage tank, oil

heater, oil and gas separator,

unloading platform, produce

water storage, flare stack

-----

• Area shall be covered in case of

any excavation to be done.

• Top soil and excavated earth

shall be stacked nearby and

reused for site leveling and

green belt development

Total build up area to be

constructed at site is 678 sq m at

M 1 and 550 sq m at M 1 A 1

(office building and security cabin)

4. Transportation • Air emission due to vehicle

movement (both during

• No impact on transport • Road mainly required to

transport maximum one tanker

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


construction and operation)

• Air emission due to

construction activities

• Traffic

• Noise level rise due to

vehicles and construction

activities

• Vehicles with PUC certificate

shall be allowed

• Maintenance check for vehicles

shall be registered

in two days

5. Abstraction of oil from

well

• Pressure fluctuations

• Chances of blow out

• Safety valve Well head tubing pressure to be

maintained at 0 – 50 psi

Pressure at separator to be

maintained at 35 - 70 psi

6. Operation of gas and

oil separators

• Spillage of oil on ground due

to leak and cleaning process

• Flaring of gas

• Elevated platform to be provided

• Separated gas to be maximum

utilized in bath heater

• Excess gas only to be flared

• Cleaning up of system shall be

done frequently hence it is

suggested that flooring to be

paved completely with

surrounding drainage in order to

collect spillage

Height of platform: 1 feet from

ground level

Quantity of gas to be used in bath

heater: 960 m3/day (this quantity

is based on the standards,

considering the maximum capacity

of 15 m3/hour)

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


• Oil collection sump to be

provided

• Provision shall be made for

transfer of oil collected during

cleaning and leakage to be

diverted back to temporary

storage tank

7. Generation of produce

water

• Ground water contamination

due to improper storage on

ground

• Water shall consist of traces

of oil and grease and higher

TDS level

• Pit with impervious bottom liner

and side liner with storage

capacity of 30 days to be

constructed

• Later sent to CETP for further

treatment through tankers

Size of pit for storage of produce

water: 200 m3

8. Transfer of oil to

temporary storage tank

farm

• Pipeline chocking in winter

• At time of repairing there are

chances of spillage from

pipeline on ground

• Pipelines will be insulated

• RCC constructed drain having

size of 0.5 m higher than pipe

shall be laid below pipeline

• Spilled oil collected through

sump

• Drain to be constructed in steep

gradient so at any point same

shall flow towards collection

Details of pipe rupture during

transfer of oil is covered in risk

assessment study

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


sump

• Blind flange provision to be

provided so that maintenance

can be done segment wise

• Quality of material capable to

withstand pressure

9. Crude oil Storage tank • Spillage on ground

• Incidental collapse of tank

• Electric spark lead to fire

• Emission due to gases

• Tank should be at sufficient

height with proper dyke wall

• Dyke with capacity of 1.5 times

the tank volume shall be

provided to confine the 100 %

of spill even during complete

collapse of tank.

• Vent shall be provided in tank for

release of gases formed within

tank

• Auto level control switch shall be

provided to avoid over flow from

tanks

• Proper MOC, color to be adopted

to avoid corrosion of tank and

less maintenance

Details of temporary storage tank

rupture is covered in risk

assessment study

Fire hazards due to electric spark

discussed in risk assessment study

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


• Proper safety markings to be

placed in the area

• Fire Fighting system arranged as

per OISD standard

• Frequent cleaning of dyke wall

area

10. Transfer from storage

to tankers (loading –

unloading)

• Spillage from joints and

glands

• Spillage from loading and

unloading activity

• Timely inspection and

maintenance of joints and glands

• Provision of sump to stand by

pumps

• PCC area

• Top platform to be covered from

top to protect from rain water

----

11. Flare • Air emission

• Noise emission

• Flaring at proper height

• Human interference shall be

minimum in the area

• Auto ignition system should be

provided

• Only technical flaring

All the gases will be burnt during

flaring and converted to CO2. The

same shall be emitted

12. Stand by D G sets • Air emission of PM, SOx, NOx • Stack height as per CPCB norms Increase in concentration of PM,

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


• Separate Storage of fuel to be

provided with area demarcation

SOx, NOx due to DG set is

calculated by Gaussian Plume

model

The principal source of electricity

for the project will be State

Electricity Board. Only in rare

cases when there will be power

failure DG sets will be operative

and the scenario discussed here

will become applicable. Flaring will

be temporary activity wherein the

gas produced will be burnt.

Hydrocarbon in major portion with

traces of CO2 will be formed.

13. Hazardous waste

generation from

different activities

• Used oil, oily sludge

and oily cotton waste

will be generated

• The spillage of oil on land will

lead to contamination of soil

and in later stages will

contaminate the ground

water in the area

• Care shall be taken during

handling of hazardous waste

• Separate storage area shall be

constructed with concrete base

• The waste should be stored in

separate containers

• The area shall be isolated and

covered in order to prevent the

----

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


infiltration of rainy water

• The waste collected shall be

regularly transported to approved

TSDF site / registered CPCB

recyclers

14. Socio economic impact

• Positive impact • Change in personal income

resulting from new employment

of workers, purchase of services

from local area vendors, lease,

and production payments

• Induced economic activity from

local purchases of land,

equipments, supplies and

services

At Each facilities

Skilled workers: 6 Nos

Unskilled workers: 3 Nos

Please register P

DF

Splitter and M

erger

DE

MO


Chapter 6 Environment Management Plan

6 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

From construction and operation activities of the process, environmental impact has

been identified, predicated and evaluated to mitigate the standards specified by the

statutory authority and minimize the impact on eco system Environmental Management

Plan (EMP). Environmental Management Plan provides control measures of potential

environmental impacts. Environmental Management System for different environmental

attributes is discussed in subsequent topics.

6.1 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS OF EMP

The basis of the operational philosophy of GSPC Limited is that the activities proposed in

oil and gas processing (upstream and mid stream) shall be operated in complete

compliance with all applicable Laws, Regulations, Standards and Permits, the Production

Sharing Contract (PSC), GSPC corporate policies, procedures, specifications, rules,

standards and guidelines.

In order to achieve this, GSPC will establish a resource base for the management of

health, safety, environmental and social issues during construction and operation of EPS.

Technically qualified and experienced staff will be deployed. Detailed procedures and

plans will be developed for each activity prior to operations start up. All persons on this

project work will be qualified and well experienced.

The HSE Management System Process which has been developed for use as part of the

implementation of the operations philosophy will be followed, together with the

commitments contained within the GSPC corporate Health, Safety and Environment

(HSE) Policy. The System also contains adequate security measures that are designed to

protect people and property.

6.2 ENVIRONMENT MANGEMENT PLAN

6.2.1 Ambient Air

6.2.1.1 Construction Phase

The construction phase impacts would be mainly due to civil works such as site

preparation comprising heavy earthmoving, site grading, RCC foundations etc.;

construction material and machinery transportation, fabrication and erection etc.


DEMO


The construction phase impacts will be temporary and localized phenomenon. The

environment management to be implemented during the construction phase is as

delineated below:

The top layer soil which is excavated during site leveling shall be sold to contractor or

shall be disposed off in the low lying area instead of accumulating the same on the road

or the premises area.

Temporary huts of the construction labors shall be arranged within the project

boundary.

The site grading, partial level rising as required at project site shall be planned

keeping in view the natural drainage around the project site.

The vehicles used for transportation of construction material shall be certified valid

PUC.

The trucks carrying cement and sand shall be covered in order to prevent the

fugitive emissions due to material handling.

Temporary shed shall be developed in order to store the construction material inside

the project premises.

The machinery used for construction purpose shall be properly maintained and

serviced.

It should be ensured that diesel powered vehicles and construction machinery are

properly maintained to minimize the exhaust emissions as well as noise generation

The construction debris generated shall be properly stored in the shed and later

should be used for leveling of low lying area and road construction.

Regular water sprinkling shall be done in the storage area and within the plant

boundary for dust suppression.

The fuel used for the machines should be of good quality.

Proper arrangement shall be made to prevent to washout of construction material

during the monsoon season. Temporary shed of brick should be constructed during

the monsoon season for the storage of construction material.

Proper storm water management system shall be integrated in design phase and

civil works shall be carried out accordingly at project site.

Once the construction phase is completed, proper clean up of the plant area shall be

done and the construction debris and the other waste shall be disposed off at the

low lying areas.


DEMO


6.2.1.2 Operation Phase


Stack height shall be based as per the statutory requirement of CPCB. The stack height

for DG sets are based on the below

H = h + 0.2 √KVA

Where H = height of stack; h = height of building/ Base of installation

Stack height for oil and gas separators were decided based on the OMR (1984

guidelines). There will be no stack installed with the heater.

Installation of proper stack height will lead to proper dispersion of pollutants

VOC emissions

VOC emitted during the production will be burnt in flaring with associated gases. In order

to limit the emission of VOC, the handling operation shall be carried out in closed

system.

Fugitive emissions

Fugitive emission shall be from valve and flanges, periodic maintenance of the pipeline

and tanks. Record of same shall be maintained.

Transportation will also lead to fugitive emission. Connecting roads from site to main

roads should be concreted to minimize increase in particulate matter due to

transportation of final product. Vehicular emission will lead to increase in SO2 and NOx

with HC in the area. The vehicles used for transportation should have valid PUC

certificate and a check of same shall be done at the entry gate of site.

Green belt to mitigate pollution

Adequate green belt shall be developed within and outside the premises to abate air and

noise pollution. The plants recommended for the project shall be based on the following

three criteria

• Plants resistant to pollution

• Plants resident in this area

The major plants recommended for green belt development is as mentioned in Table 53


DEMO


Table 53: Species for Green Belt Development

Plant species Common

Name/

Vernacular

name

Habit Toleran

ce limit

Stomatal

index

Mode of

Regeneration

Acacia auriculiformis Eaarpod wattle/

Australian

Baval/

Tree T 10.9 Seeds

Acacia leucophloea White barked

Acacia/Ronjh/H

ermo baval/

Samadi

Shrub T 12.01 Seeds

Ailanthus excelsa Maharukh

Ardusi/ arduso

Tree T 13.01 Seeds, shoot, root

cuttings

Albizia amara Krishna Siris Tree T -- seeds

Albizia chinensis Silk Tree Tree T -- Seeds

Albizia lebbeck Siris/ Shirish Tree T 19.72 seeds

Albizia procera Doon Sirs/

Safed Siris

Tree T 20.21 seeds

Alstona scholaris Sage lave

Alangium/

Saptparni

Tree T 15.23 seeds

Azadirachta indica Neem/ Limdo Tree T 29.2 Seeds

Bougainvillea spectabilis Bouganvel Shrub T 32.53 Cutting

Caesalpinia pulcherrima Peacock flower/

Galtora

Tree T 29.09 Seeds and

Cuttings

Callistemon citrinus Weeping

Bottlebrush

tree

Small

tree

T 127.49 Seeds

Cassia javanica Pink and White

Shower/ Java

Cassia

Tree T seeds


DEMO


Senna siamea Yellow cassia/

Kassod,

Tree T 21.2 Seeds

Dalbergia sisoo Shisham/

Indian Rose

wood/ Moto

Sisam

Tree T 18.72 Seeds/cuttings

Dalbergia latifoloa Shisham/Sisam tree T 10.12 Seeds/ cuttings

Delonix regia Flame tree/

Gulmohar

Tree S 14.38 Seeds /stem

cutting

Hibiscus rosa-sinensis China

rose/Jasud

Small

tree

T 23.32 stem cutting

Ixora arborea Ixora/ Nevari

Small

tree

T 17.3 stem cutting

Ixora rosea An Ornamental

tree

Small

tree

T 20.30 Stem cutting

Kegelia Africana Sausage Tree

Balam Kheera

Small

tree

T 12.90 Seeds

Lantana camara Lantana weed/

Ganthai/

Gandhata

shrub T 12.13 Seeds/cuttings

Lowsonia intermis Henna/ Cypress

Shrub/ Mehndi

Shrub T 17.0 Seeds/cuttings

Mangifera indica Mango Tree/

Keri

Tree S 30.77 Seeds/

budding/grafting

Melia azadirachta Persian Lilac/

Bakan Limdo

Tree T Seeds /stem

cutting

Nerium indicum Lal Karen Shrub T 15.7 Cutting

Peltophorum

pterocarpum

Copper pod/

Surajmukhi

Tree T 16.78 Seeds

Pithecellobium ducle Goras Aamli Tree T 11.78 Seeds/ cuttings


DEMO


Polyathia longifolia Ashoka

Tree/Asopalav

Tree S 22.27 seeds

Prosopis cineraria Jhand/Khyidgo Tree T 18.1 Seeds/root suckers

Syzygium cumini Jamuun/Jambu tree T 20.60 Seeds

Terminalia catapppa Desi Badam Tree T 20.9 seeds

Thespesia populneoides Idian Tulip

teee/Paras

Piplo

Tree T 29.81 Seeds/ cuttings

Thevetia peruviana Yellow

oleander/Pili

Karen

Shrub T 27.8 Seeds

T: Tolerant S- sensitive, (--) =Not available Sources: CPCB (March, 2000) Guidelines

for developing green belts PROBES/75/1999-2000

6.2.2 Noise

6.2.2.1 Construction phase

Minor increase in noise generation will take place due to transportation of construction

material at site. The EMP for noise is as mentioned below

• Though the effect of noise on the nearby inhabitants due to construction activity

will be insignificant as per the proposed plot plan, noise prone activities should be

restricted to the extent possible during day time in order to have minimum noise

impact during night time.

• Noise generation due to friction from the machines shall be avoided by regular

maintenance

• Ear muffs shall be provided to workers to minimize the effect of noise during

construction activity

6.2.2.2 Operation phase

None of the production activities in the proposed project will lead to major increase in

noise level in the surrounding.

Minor increase will be within the project boundary premises due to the operation of flare,

running of fire pump, DG set etc. None of these operations shall be continuous

operation. Human movement shall be prohibited in the area during the operation of

flare. GSPC PPE policy shall be implemented


DEMO


6.2.3 Water

During Construction

Water requirement during site preparation shall be negligible quantity and restricted for

domestic purposes.

Water Conservation

The first step toward the management of water environment would be conservation of

the water. Proper step shall be taken to conserve the water, apart from the reuse and

recycle of the wastewater generated.

• Storm water drainage network shall be designed

• Faucets uses are of low water consumption type

• W.C, Flush and Urinal Flush valve shall be of low water consumption type

Rain water harvesting scheme shall be implemented. The expected ground water

recharge proposed is as mentioned in Table 54

Considering the range of recharge rate as 2 liter per second per well and by constructing

1 to 2 recharge well, the total likely recharge may vary from 10368.00 m3 to 20736 m3

Table 54: Expected Recharge Rate

Expected

Recharge

Rate Per

Well

Seconds Minutes Hours Days Total

recharge

in m3 per

well

Number

of wells

Total

recharge

in

m3/season

2 60 60 24 60 10368.00 1 10368.00

2 60 60 24 60 10368.00 2 20736.00

Table 55: Estimation on Availability of Yearly Runoff (M 1 Site)

Area Area Runoff

coefficient

Long Term

Average

Rainfall

Estimate

runoff

Build up area 678 sq m 0.40 824.8 mm 223.68 m3

Open area 12331.91 sq m 0.40 824.8 mm 4068.54 m3

Green belt area 6408.39 sq m 0.40 824.8 mm 2114.25 m3

Total area 19418.3 sq m 6406.47 m3


DEMO


Estimated Yearly Runoff Availability at M 1 is around 6406.47 m3

Table 56: Estimation on Availability of Yearly Runoff (M1 A 1 Site)

Area Area Runoff

coefficient

Long Term

Average

Rainfall

Estimate

runoff

Build up area 550 sq m 0.40 824.8 mm 181.45 m3

Open area 14581.95 sq m 0.40 824.8 mm 4810.87 m3

Green belt area 7453.05 sq m 0.40 824.8 mm 2458.91 m3

Total area 22585 sq m 7451.23 m3

Estimated Yearly Runoff Availability at M 1 A 1 Site is around 7451.23 m3

• Daily Water Requirement is 2.705 KL /day

• If 365 working days are considered, total yearly water requirement will be 987.32

m3/year.

• Hence the yearly runoff availability at M 1 and M 1 A 1 is higher than the total

water requirement of the project

This site is for petroleum / production which is non disposable source of pollution,

therefore in such areas recharge through pond is preferred. Recharge structure like

recharge pond is advisable

In case of constructing recharge tube well, only rooftop rain water; after subjected

through infiltrating media; should be used for recharging aquifer or for rain water

harvesting

6.2.4 Waste Water

Construction phase

The major waste water generated during construction activity will be from domestic

activities. The same shall be disposed through septic tank/ soak pit.

Operation phase

Crude and water will be extracted in mixture from separator. Produced Water shall be

later drained from the crude oil and collected in waste water pit constructed specifically

for collection of produced water and for its further separation from any oil droplet.

The capacity of drain pit to be provided at site is 200 m3 (divided in to 2 equal halves of

100 m3). It shall be further analyzed by MoEF recognized laboratories and later disposed


DEMO


based on the effluent characteristics. Domestic waste water shall be sent to septic tank/

soak pit.

Figure 17: Typical layout diagram of wastewater storage pit

6.2.5 Solid Waste

Solid waste will be in form of domestic waste which shall be disposed off through door to

door collection system of municipality

6.2.6 Hazardous waste

Construction phase

Hazardous materials such as lubricating oil, paints and varnishes are required during

construction phase which should be stored properly as per the safety regulations at

isolated places.

Accidental spillages of oil from construction equipment and storage sites should be

prevented.

Operation phase

The hazardous wastes generated during the operation phase are as mentioned in

Table 57: Hazardous waste generation

M 1 M 1 A1






be handed over to authorized recyclers.


DEMO


Hazardous Waste Storage room

Generated used oil shall be stored in dedicated hazardous waste storage shed.

Generated used oil shall be stored in 200 liter drums.

Figure 18: Design of storage room

In case spillage occurs same need to be disposed off through common infrastructure

facility.

Direct manual handling of waste will be avoided. The person handling the waste will be

equipped with hand gloves resistant to the waste, respiratory mask and goggles.

Record of the hazardous waste generated shall be maintained as per the Hazardous

waste rules 2008 in the prescribed format and the same shall be regularly submitted to

statutory authority. Prior to dispatch of the waste to the recycler company representative

shall keep a check on the valid authorization and approval obtained by the recycler from

Central Pollution Control board.

6.3 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL

During operational phase of the proposed plant, overall implementation of EMP lies with

the project proponent for compliance.

Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) is one of the key business processes of

organization owned by General Manager (Safety).

General Manager (Safety) shall be responsible for compliance of the norms given under

the EPA rules.

The company has QHSE department. Compliance officer (Senior Officer – Environment)

will be appointed who is part of QHSE team. The compliance officer shall communicate

non compliance of environmental norms to Board of Director

2.5 m

3 m

Spillage collection sump

0.5 m side draining


DEMO


All the key business process owner shall report the non compliance aspect in legislative

register and the same shall be submitted to the compliance officer.

The compliance officer shall put a note in every board meeting to the Board of Directors

regarding the non compliances/ violations if any.

In order to have effective implementation of EMP, the following structure of Environment

Management Cell is proposed

Figure 19: Organization Chart with Environment Management Cell at corporate level of GSPC Limited

General Manager (Safety)

Director

(Production)

Officer

Manager - QHSE

Installation Manager/ Shift In

charge

Chief Operating Officer

Managing Director

Manager - Production

Senior officer-

Safety

Senior officer -

Environment

Asst. Manager - Production


DEMO


Figure 20: Organization chart at project site

• The activities at project site shall be completely governed by Installation

Manager. He shall be responsible for implementation of Environment and Safety

rules at site.

• Installation manager shall directly report at corporate office.

• A full fledge Environment Management Cell is operative at corporate level to

monitor the compliance at different sites operated by GSPC Limited.

• This cell shall be responsible for developing and implementing environmental

management plan.

• Company has its own Health, Safety and Environment policy (HSE) and same

shall be strictly followed.

• Environmental Management Cell (EMC) will meet quarterly to assess the progress

and analyze the data collected for the month.

The major duties and responsibilities of Environmental Management Cell shall be as

given below:

• To implement the environmental management plan

• To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations

• To ensure regular operation and maintenance of pollution control devices.

• To minimize environmental impacts of operations as by strict adherence to the

EMP

• To initiate the environmental monitoring as per approved schedule

Installation Manager

Shift in charge

Contract Supervisor

Field staff/ Work man

engineer

Asst. Manager – Production (at

corporate office)

Senior officer –

Safety & Environment

(at corporate office)


DEMO


• Review and interpretation of monitoring as per approved schedule and corrective

measures in case monitoring results are above the specified limits

• Maintain documents of good environmental practices and applicable

environmental laws as ready reference

• Maintain environmental related records

• Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants, monitoring

laboratories

• Maintain of log of public complaints and the action taken

Allocation of Resources, Responsibility and Authority will result in successful

implementation of EMP during construction and operational phase.

The company has its Health, Safety and Environment Policy with company’s vision,

sustainable policy and EHS charter. The copy of same is attached as Annexure 13

6.4 BUDGETARY ALLOCATION FOR ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

Table 58 depicts the resources required during construction and operation stages and

the estimated budget against each resource for environment management.

Table 58: Estimated cost of implementation of EMP for each site

Activities Budget allocation

Disposal cost of produced water : ` 3.75 lakhs per month

Fire fighting system : ` 23 lakhs

Construction of septic tank/ soak pit : ` 4 lakhs

Environmental Monitoring And Management : ` 1 lakh per annum for each site

Occupational Health & Safety : ` 25,000

Green Belt : ` 50,000


DEMO


Chapter 7 Environment Monitoring Plan

7 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING PLAN

Based on the baseline conditions of the area and the environment management plan, a

detailed monitoring program for the construction and operation phase is designed.

Environment monitoring will serve as an indicator for any deterioration in environment

conditions due to operation of the project. Regular monitoring of environment

parameters will serve as a measure to check the efficiency of Pollution control measures

implemented. Company shall appoint MoEF - NABL approved laboratory for the sampling

and analysis of environment parameters.

The main attributes for which monitoring shall be carried out are:

• Ambient air Quality

• Stack Emission

• Wastewater Quality

• Drinking water Quality

• Noise Level

7.1 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING:

The ambient air quality with respect to NOx, SO2, PM10 and PM2.5, VOC, HC, CO shall be

monitored at project location.

The selected monitoring stations shall be monitored for a period of 24 hours quarterly.

The log book shall be maintained at environmental cell for evaluation of impact and to

decide required mitigatory measures

7.2 STACK MONITORING:

The stacks in the proposed project shall be monitored on quarterly basis, with respect to

temperature, oxides of nitrogen (NOx), Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM), Sulphur

dioxide (SOx), VOC level, HC, CO, CO2. It is also recommended the relevant parameter

should be monitored by external agency approved by MoEF - NABL.

7.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Monitoring of the noise levels is essential to assess the effectiveness of Environmental

Management Plan implemented to reduce noise levels. A good quality sound level meter

and noise exposure meter may be procured for the same. Audiometric tests shall be


DEMO


conducted periodically for the employees working close to the high noise sources. The

noise levels due to machines/equipments should be monitored regularly.

7.4 WATER AND WASTE WATER QUALITY MONITORING

Drinking water shall be analyzed to check the drinking water standards as prescribed in

IS 14001:2012. Waste water generated (if any) in form of produced water shall also be

analyzed before sending to CETP

7.4.1 Environment laboratory

Methods prescribed in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater"

prepared and published jointly by American Public Health Association (APHA), American

Water Works Association (AWWA) and Water Pollution Control Federation (WPCF), Book

on Water and Wastewater Analysis published by NEERI, Nagpur are recommended for

collection and analysis of water and wastewater samples.

Table 59: Monitoring schedule

Area of

monitoring

Number of

sampling

station

Frequency of

Sampling

Parameters to be analyzed

Ambient air

Quality

Onsite = One

Villages=One

Quarterly PM10 and PM2.5

NOx, SO2, CO, HC, VOC

Stack

Monitoring

All the stacks Quarterly Temperature, NOX, SO2, SPM

Noise Near all the sound

generating

devices and near

the project site

Quarterly (day

time and night

time)

Sound pressure level (Leq)

Produced

water

Produced water

pond

Before sending to

CETP

pH, Conductivity, TDS, TSS,

BOD, COD, Oil and grease

Environmental management cell shall be created and qualified persons would be in

charge of monitoring the parameters by using suitable instruments. The detail of same is

discussed in chapter 5.

7.5 POST PROJECT ENVIRONMENT MONITORING BUDGETARY ALLOCATION:

The total cost allocated for post project monitoring is given in chapter 5.


DEMO


Chapter 8 Project Benefits

8 PROJECT BENEFITS

Recommendation for Socio economic activities

Based on the various studies conducted during the baseline survey the following points

related to social environment have been highlighted in the study area

• The area is majorly covered by agricultural land hence company shall provide

compensation for the land acquisition to the land oustees and for standing crop as

per the National Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy (NRRP) 2007 / State

Government norms. It may be ensure that compensation provided shall not be

less than the norms of the NRRP-2007

• Workers from nearby villages shall be given priority for employment as per their

skills.

• The region falls in the critical zone as classified by Central Ground Water

Authority (CGWA) hence Rain water harvesting shall be implemented at the

project site.

• Sarus Crane is seen in the Sarthal village. Public education programs involving

the Sarus Crane and special opportunities to emphasize the uniqueness of the

Sarus Crane as the world’s tallest flying bird

Socioeconomic activities

The company is committed for contribution of funds and provides the services for the

upliftment of local community in the nearby villages. GSPC being Government of Gujarat

owned company, all the CSR activity as applicable and instructed by Government of

Gujarat shall be carried out. The different activities which shall be considered by the

company, under the directives of Govt. of Gujarat are mentioned in this chapter

• Development of school at nearby Villages.

• Scholarships to bright students.

• Programs for environmental education and public participation shall be developed

with the help of audio visual aids to create awareness about the activities.

• Proper awareness campaign shall be organized by the project proponent for water

conservation.

• In order to increase the aesthetic environment, road side plantation program shall

be carried out in the nearby villages.


DEMO


• Group Insurance to all employees over and above the Employees State Insurance

Scheme

• Fire & Safety Training will be imparted to employees.

• Fire Fighting and safety awareness training to the villagers.

• Fire fighting and Safety Week will be organize and quiz and essay competitions

will be organized to develop awareness in employees on the subject.

• Celebration of World Environment Day every year on 5th June will be marked by

plantation of number of trees by employees in order to develop awareness in

them about protecting environment from pollution and to save earth.

Community Awareness programmed like Aids awareness, Polio camps, Eye camps and

blood donation camps will be organized in the company and in its vicinity from time to

time for the benefit of employees and their families and people living in the surrounding

area.

8.1 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

There will be increase in the employment facilities due to the upcoming project. The total

no. of worker to be employed for the proposed project is as given in Table 60.

Table 60: Employment generation at each site

Skilled

workers

Unskilled workers include

drivers, security personnel’s etc

Total manpower at each site 6 3


DEMO


Chapter 9 Disclosure of Consultant

9 CONSULTANT DETAILS

The preparation of EIA was done by M/s Detox Corporation Pvt. Ltd. having NABET

accreditation for conducting EIA studies for project activities listed under onshore oils

and gas exploration, development and production. The baseline study for the project was

conducted by in-house laboratory of M/s Detox Corporation Pvt. Ltd. having NABL

certification. The EIA Team engaged in the preparation of EIA report consist of

professionals with multidisciplinary skill and relevant experience required for undertaking

this project. Following are the specific roles and responsibilities of the key team

members:

KEY FACTS

Established in the year – 1995

Our Growth through years -

1995: Laid Foundation Stone of Firm Activities covered fabrication & equipment

supply

1997: Developed Turnkey execution.

1997: Developed core competence for conducting Environment Audits.

1998: Developed a Full Fledged Laboratory

1998: Construction of ETP’s & STP’s

2000: Developed core competence for preparation of EIA Study Reports

2002: Expansion and Modernization of Lab & Office.

2004: Certified for ISO 9001: 2000 (QMS)

2004: Established First Branch Office at Gandhidham, Kutch

2005: Tie up with Ozmotech, Australia for Converting Waste Plastic to Diesel

2006: Foundation laid for setting up a Total Hazardous Waste Management site at

Kutch, Gujarat

2008: Started Development of Integrated Common Hazardous waste management

facility in Kutch region in name of SEPPL

2013: Started Development of Integrated Common Hazardous waste incineration facility

in Dahej region in name of SEPPL


DEMO


ACCREDITATIONS

• ISO 9001-2008 certification

• NABL (National Accreditation Board for Testing & Calibration Laboratories)

• NABET (National Accreditation Board for Education & Training) registration from

Quality Council of India as EIA Consultant

REGISTRATIONS

• Class AA Contractor registration from Surat Municipal Corporation (SMC)

• Recognized Environmental Auditors from GPCB

• MoEF Registration for recognized Environmental Lab.

LIST OF EC & FAE INVOLVED IN REPORT PREPARATION

The list of experts involved in report preparation with authorization for MD of

organization is attached as second page of report


DEMO


Index

Annexure 1: Layout Map

Annexure 2: Photograph of EPS facility

Annexure 3: Photograph of baseline study & Public hearing

Annexure 4: Geohydrology report

Annexure 5: Bio ecology report

Annexure 6: Land use report

Annexure 7: Socio economic Report

Annexure 8: Risk assessment and Disaster Management plan

Annexure 9: Applicable Legislation

Annexure 10: Ambient Air Quality Report

Annexure 11: Ground and Surface Water Quality Report

Annexure 12: EC Compliance Report

Annexure 13: HSE Policy

Annexure 14: Minutes of Meeting of Public Hearing

Annexure 15: NABET Accreditation

Annexure 16: TOR Copy


DEMO